Tag Archives: Advanced (300)

Optimizing cold start performance of AWS Lambda using advanced priming strategies with SnapStart

Post Syndicated from Shan Kandaswamy original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/compute/optimizing-cold-start-performance-of-aws-lambda-using-advanced-priming-strategies-with-snapstart/

Introduced at re:Invent 2022, SnapStart is a performance optimization that makes it easier to build highly responsive and scalable applications using AWS Lambda. The largest contributor to startup latency (often referred to as cold-start time) is the time spent initializing a function. This includes loading the function’s code and initializing dependencies. For latency-sensitive workloads such as APIs and real-time data processing applications, high startup latency can result in a suboptimal end user experience. Lambda SnapStart can reduce startup duration from several seconds to as low as sub-second, with minimal or no code changes. This post discusses ‘Priming’, a technique to further optimize startup times for AWS Lambda functions built using Java and Spring Boot.

Spring Boot applications typically experience high cold start latency during JVM and framework initialization, where significant time is spent loading classes and performing Just-In-Time (JIT) compilation of Java bytecode. This blog post uses a Spring Boot application as an example that retrieves 10 records from a ‘UnicornEmployee’ table in an Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL database, where each employee record includes employee name, location, and hire date.

The sample application uses Amazon API Gateway which triggers an AWS Lambda function that connects to the database through RDS Proxy to return the employee data. While this sample application uses dummy employee data for demonstration, the patterns and optimization techniques discussed in this post are applicable to real-world scenarios with similar data access patterns. Sample code for this implementation can be found in our GitHub repository at lambda-priming-crac-java-cdk.

Background: How SnapStart works

The post assumes familiarity with SnapStart and provides a short background. For additional details, refer to the SnapStart documentation.

To quickly recap, the INIT phase for a Lambda function involves downloading the function’s code, starting the runtime and any external dependencies, and running the function’s initialization code. For functions that don’t use SnapStart, this phase occurs each time your application scales up to create a new execution environment. When SnapStart is activated, the INIT phase happens when you publish a function version.

The following image shows a comparison of a Lambda request lifecycle with and without SnapStart.

Figure 1 – comparison of a Lambda request lifecycle with and without SnapStart

At the end of the INIT phase, Lambda executes your before-checkpoint runtime hooks. Lambda then snapshots the memory and disk state of the initialized execution environment, persists the encrypted snapshot, and caches it for low-latency access. When the function is subsequently invoked, new execution environments are resumed from the cached snapshot (during the RESTORE phase), speeding up function startup.

Figure 2 – new execution environments are resumed from the cached snapshot.

You can validate this speedup by comparing the RESTORE duration with the INIT duration recorded before SnapStart in your Lambda function’s Amazon CloudWatch Logs. As demonstrated in the following table, enabling SnapStart reduces the startup latency of our sample Spring Boot application by 4.3x from 6.1s to 1.4s. The 6.1s cold start latency for ON_DEMAND is primarily due to the combination of (1) initializing the JVM and Spring Boot framework, (2) JIT compilation of lazy loaded application code during initial invocation and (3) the time needed to establish a database connection with RDS through Amazon RDS Proxy. By enabling SnapStart, Lambda initializes the JVM and Spring Boot prior to the function invocation – resulting in the significantly reduced latency of 1.4s.

Method Cold Start Invocations p50 P90 P99 p99.9
PrimingLogGroup-1_ON_DEMAND 128 5047.94 ms 5386.78 ms 6158.80 ms 6195.84 ms
PrimingLogGroup-2_SnapStart_NO_PRIMING 111 1177.87 ms 1288.73 ms 1419.94 ms 1425.63 ms

You can reduce cold starts even further for your latency-sensitive Spring Boot applications by using priming techniques on Lambda functions. Let’s explore how to implement priming techniques.

Priming explained

Priming is the process of preloading dependencies and initializing resources during the INIT phase, rather than during the INVOKE phase to further optimize startup performance with SnapStart. This is required because Java frameworks that use dependency injection load classes into memory when these classes are explicitly invoked, which typically happens during Lambda’s INVOKE phase. You can proactively load classes using Java runtime hooks, that are part of the open source CRaC (Coordinated Restore at Checkpoint) project. This post demonstrates how to use this hook, called beforeCheckpoint(), to prime SnapStart-enabled Java functions, in two ways:

  1. Invoke Priming: This approach involves directly invoking application endpoints or methods in your pre-snapshotting hook so that they are JIT compiled during the INIT phase and included in the snapshot. This can include operations such as invoking API Gateway endpoints or fetching data from an S3 bucket or RDS database to proactively execute the code paths, ensuring that the underlying classes are included in the snapshot.
  2. Class Priming: This approach involves proactive initialization of classes during the INIT phase, ensuring that they are included in the function’s snapshot without risking unwanted changes to application state or data. This can be achieved by leveraging Java’s forName() method, which loads, links, and initializes the specified class. Initialization refers to the JVM process of loading the class definition into memory, verifying the bytecode, preparing static fields with default values, and executing static initializers. This is different from instantiation, which creates objects of the class using constructors. To generate a list of the classes required for pre-loading, you can use the following VM option, writing the list to a file called classes-loaded.txt:
    -Xlog:class+load=info:classes-loaded.txt

While invoke priming can offer better performance, it requires additional effort to ensure that the actions performed are idempotent and do not have unintended side effects, for instance processing financial transactions in a banking application. For this reason, invoke priming should only be used when code executed during priming is either idempotent or does not modify state. For scenarios where this is not possible, class priming provides a safer alternative by only initializing classes without executing their methods. Note that this assumes your application does not execute state-modifying code during class initialization.

With this context, let’s look at how to implement Invoke and Class priming for a Spring Boot sample application.

Example priming Implementation using CRaC runtime hooks before taking a Lambda snapshot

This post demonstrates both Invoke priming and Class priming using the sample Spring Boot application. The choice between the two approaches depends on the specific requirements and complexities of your application.

Step 1: Set up your Spring Boot Application using the aws-serverless-springboot3-archetype as explained in our Quick Start Spring Boot3 guide, adding database connectivity code, or simply clone the sample project from GitHub repository.

  1. Create a Spring Boot Application.
    // src/main/java/software/amazon/awscdk/examples/unicorn/UnicornApplication.java
    package software.amazon.awscdk.examples.unicorn;
    …
    @Import({ UnicornConfig.class })
    @SpringBootApplication
    public class UnicornApplication {
    
        private static final Logger log = LoggerFactory.getLogger(UnicornApplication.class);
    
        public static void main(String... arguments) {
            SpringApplication.run(UnicornApplication.class, arguments);
        }
    
    }

  2. Add all the necessary Maven dependencies for Spring Boot, AWS Lambda, and Database Connection in your pom.xml file. The following, highlighted, dependency contains the classes required to use the CRaC runtime hooks.
    ...
            <dependency>
                <groupId>org.crac</groupId>
                <artifactId>crac</artifactId>
            </dependency>
    ...

  3. Configure Database Connection – Set up the database connection details in application.properties.
    spring.datasource.password=${SPRING_DATASOURCE_PASSWORD} 
    spring.datasource.url=${SPRING_DATASOURCE_URL} 
    spring.datasource.username=postgres 
    spring.datasource.hikari.maximumPoolSize=1 

Step 2: Implement Lambda Function Handler with CRaC runtime hooks and Invoke Priming Approach:

Create Lambda Function Handler and integrate CRaC runtime hooks to execute beforeCheckpoint() and afterRestore() methods in your application for before taking and after restoring the snapshot.

  1. Implement the RequestHandler<UnicornRequest, UnicornResponse> interface in the Lambda function handler class.
  2. Implement the CRaC resource interface with two methods: beforeCheckpoint() and afterRestore(), which defines actions performed before Lambda creates the snapshot and after the snapshot is restored.
  3. Add invoke priming by creating a UnicornRequest object with a GET request to a specific endpoint (such as, /unicorn) and call the handleRequest(unicornRequest, null) method.

This ensures that the code paths associated with the specified endpoint are JIT compiled and optimized for faster execution during the first invocation after the snapshot is restored.

/src/main/java/software/amazon/awscdk/examples/unicorn/handler/InvokePriming.java
package software.amazon.awscdk.examples.unicorn.handler;

import org.crac.Core;
import org.crac.Resource;
...
public class InvokePriming implements RequestHandler<APIGatewayV2HTTPEvent, APIGatewayV2HTTPResponse>, Resource {
	...

@Override
public APIGatewayV2HTTPResponse handleRequest(APIGatewayV2HTTPEvent event, Context context) {
    var awsLambdaInitializationType = System.getenv("AWS_LAMBDA_INITIALIZATION_TYPE");
    var unicorns = getUnicorns();
    var body = gson.toJson(unicorns);
    return APIGatewayV2HTTPResponse.builder().withStatusCode(200).withBody(body).build();
}

@Override
public void beforeCheckpoint(org.crac.Context<? extends Resource> context)
        throws Exception {
    var event = APIGatewayV2HTTPEvent.builder().build();
    handleRequest(event, null);
}
...
}

Step 3: Implement Class priming Approach:

The class priming approach focuses on pre-loading required classes to achieve optimal performance. To implement class priming, generate the list of classes that are loaded during the application startup and function execution by running the application locally using the following JVM argument: -Xlog:class+load=info:classes-loaded.txt

  1. Ensure that your application classes included in the generated classes-loaded.txt file are not mutating state during static initialization.
    Note: the generated classes-loaded.txt contains class entries in the following format:

    [0.068s][info][class,load] software.amazon.awscdk.examples.unicorn.handler.ClassPriming source: file:/var/task/

  2. Extract only the fully qualified class names from each line and remove the additional logging information. For Example:
    software.amazon.awscdk.examples.unicorn.handler.ClassPriming

  3. Use the ClassLoaderUtil.loadClassesFromFile() utility method to extract the generated class entries.
    	     //src/main/java/software/amazon/awscdk/examples/unicorn/service/ClassLoaderUtil.java
    package software.amazon.awscdk.examples.unicorn;
    	...
    public class ClassLoaderUtil {
    	...
        public static void loadClassesFromFile() {
            log.info("loadClassesFromFile->started");
            Path path = Paths.get("classes-loaded.txt");
    
            try (BufferedReader bufferedReader = Files.newBufferedReader(path)) {
                Stream<String> lines = bufferedReader.lines();
                lines.forEach(line -> {
                    var index1 = line.indexOf("[class,load] ");
                    var index2 = line.indexOf(" source: ");
    
                    if (index1 < 0 || index2 < 0) {
                        return;
                    }
    
                    var className = line.substring(index1 + 13, index2);
                    try {
                        Class.forName(className, true,
                                ClassPriming.class.getClassLoader());
                    } catch (Throwable ignored) {
                    }
                });
    
                log.info("loadClassesFromFile->finished");
            } catch (IOException exception) {
                log.error("Error on newBufferedReader", exception);
            }
        }
    ...
    }

  4. Read a file (such as, /classes-loaded.txt) that contains a list of classes that have been loaded during the application’s execution in the beforeCheckpoint() method.
  5. Use the Class.forName() method to load and initialize the class, ensuring that it is ready during the snapshot.
    Note: by systematically pre-loading these classes, the Class priming approach simplifies the optimization process and reduces the complexities associated with Invoke priming.

    //src/main/java/software/amazon/awscdk/examples/unicorn/handler/ClassPriming.java
    package software.amazon.awscdk.examples.unicorn.handler;
    
    ...
    import org.crac.Core;
    import org.crac.Resource;
    
    public class ClassPriming implements RequestHandler<APIGatewayV2HTTPEvent, APIGatewayV2HTTPResponse>, Resource {
    
    ...
            ConfigurableApplicationContext configurableApplicationContext =
    				SpringApplication.run(UnicornApplication.class);
    
            this.unicornService = configurableApplicationContext.getBean(UnicornService.class);
            this.gson = configurableApplicationContext.getBean(Gson.class);
    
            Core.getGlobalContext().register(this);
        }
    
        @Override
        public APIGatewayV2HTTPResponse handleRequest(APIGatewayV2HTTPEvent event, Context context) {
            var unicorns = getUnicorns();
            var body = gson.toJson(unicorns);
    
            return APIGatewayV2HTTPResponse.builder().withStatusCode(200).withBody(body).build();
        }
    
        @Override
        public void beforeCheckpoint(org.crac.Context<? extends Resource> context)
                throws Exception {
    
            ClassLoaderUtil.loadClassesFromFile();
    
        }
    ...
    }

Step 4: AWS CDK Infrastructure Setup

Before proceeding, review the prerequisites in the project README file.

The CDK stack deploys a serverless application and required infrastructure for testing different Lambda optimization strategies. It creates a VPC with private subnets, an RDS for PostgreSQL instance with a database proxy, and five Lambda functions implementing different optimization approaches (ON_DEMAND without SnapStart, SnapStart without priming, SnapStart with invoke priming, and SnapStart with class priming). Each Lambda function is integrated with API Gateway for HTTP access, configured with Java 21 runtime on ARM64 architecture, and includes CloudWatch log groups for monitoring.

Follow these steps to deploy the infrastructure:

  1. Clone the sample repository:
    git clone https://github.com/aws-samples/lambda-priming-crac-java-cdk.git

  2. Deploy the CDK stack:
    cd lambda-priming-crac-java-cdk/infrastructure
    cdk synth
    cdk deploy --require-approval never --all 2>&1 | tee cdk_output.txt

  3. Save the API Gateway URLs:
    The deployment will output five URLs in this format:

    # ON_DEMAND endpoint (without SnapStart)
    LambdaPrimingCracJavaCdkStack.PrimingJavaRestApi1ONDEMANDEndpoint = https://[id].execute-api.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/prod/
    
    # SnapStart without priming endpoint
    LambdaPrimingCracJavaCdkStack.PrimingJavaRestApi2SnapStartNOPRIMINGEndpoint = https://[id].execute-api.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/prod/
    
    # SnapStart with invoke priming endpoint
    LambdaPrimingCracJavaCdkStack.PrimingJavaRestApi3SnapStartINVOKEPRIMINGEndpoint = https://[id].execute-api.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/prod/
    
    # SnapStart with class priming endpoint
    LambdaPrimingCracJavaCdkStack.PrimingJavaRestApi4SnapStartCLASSPRIMINGEndpoint = https://[id].execute-api.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/prod/
    
    # Database setup endpoint
    LambdaPrimingCracJavaCdkStack.PrimingJavaRestApi5DBLOADEREndpoint = https://[id].execute-api.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/prod/

  4.  Extract the URLs into variables for testing:
    ONDEMAND_URL=$(grep -oE 'https://[a-zA-Z0-9.-]+\.execute-api\.[a-zA-Z0-9-]+\.amazonaws\.com/prod/' "cdk_output.txt" | head -n 1) \
    
    NOPRIMING_URL=$(grep -oE 'https://[a-zA-Z0-9.-]+\.execute-api\.[a-zA-Z0-9-]+\.amazonaws\.com/prod/' "cdk_output.txt" | head -n 2 | tail -n 1) \
    
    INVOKEPRIMING_URL=$(grep -oE 'https://[a-zA-Z0-9.-]+\.execute-api\.[a-zA-Z0-9-]+\.amazonaws\.com/prod/' "cdk_output.txt" | head -n 3 | tail -n 1) \
    
    CLASSPRIMING_URL=$(grep -oE 'https://[a-zA-Z0-9.-]+\.execute-api\.[a-zA-Z0-9-]+\.amazonaws\.com/prod/' "cdk_output.txt" | head -n 4 | tail -n 1) \
    
    SETUP_URL=$(grep -oE 'https://[a-zA-Z0-9.-]+\.execute-api\.[a-zA-Z0-9-]+\.amazonaws\.com/prod/' "cdk_output.txt" | head -n 5 | tail -n 1)

Step 5: Load database and run performance testing using artillery:

  1. Initialize the database with sample data.
    curl -X GET "$SETUP_URL"
    
    #Expected output: {"message":"Database schema initialized and data loaded"}

  2. Run performance tests for all endpoints
    artillery run -t "$ONDEMAND_URL" -v '{ "url": "/unicorn" }' ./loadtest.yaml && \
    artillery run -t "$NOPRIMING_URL" -v '{ "url": "/unicorn" }' ./loadtest.yaml && \
    artillery run -t "$INVOKEPRIMING_URL" -v '{ "url": "/unicorn" }' ./loadtest.yaml && \
    artillery run -t "$CLASSPRIMING_URL" -v '{ "url": "/unicorn" }' ./loadtest.yaml

Step 6: Compare the load test results for On-demand (non-SnapStart), SnapStart, Invoke priming, and Class priming

The performance test results in the table below are sorted from slowest to fastest startup latency. The function without SnapStart performs the slowest due to JVM initialization, class loading and JIT compilation that occurs when the function is invoked. Notice a 4.3x improvement with SnapStart, which resumes invocations from a pre-initialized snapshot thereby avoiding JVM initialization and initial JIT compilation. SnapStart with class priming achieves a 1.4x speed-up over SnapStart, by proactively loading/initializing classes during INIT so that they are included in your function’s snapshot. Finally, SnapStart with invoke priming achieves the fastest performance – with a 781.68ms p99.9 cold-start latency that is 1.8x faster than SnapStart. This is because in addition to initializing classes, it also executes methods on the instances of those classes, resulting in even more components being included in the function’s snapshot.

Note that with invoke priming, any application code you execute must either be idempotent or modify stub data only. For instance, consider application code that triggers a financial transaction. If this code is executed during invoke priming with real user data, it may drive unintended effects with potentially serious consequences. Class priming avoids this, since application classes are initialized rather than being instantiated and their methods executed. This assumes that application code does not execute state modifying logic during class initialization. We recommend that you keep these considerations in mind when using invoke and/or class priming, and choose the appropriate approach for your use case.

Method Cold Start Invocations p50 P90 P99 p99.9
PrimingLogGroup-1_ON_DEMAND 128 5047.94 ms 5386.78 ms 6158.80 ms 6195.84 ms
PrimingLogGroup-2_SnapStart_NO_PRIMING 111 1177.87 ms 1288.73 ms 1419.94 ms 1425.63 ms
PrimingLogGroup-4_SnapStart_CLASS_PRIMING 82 857.81 ms 997.49 ms 1085.94 ms 1085.94 ms
PrimingLogGroup-3_SnapStart_INVOKE_PRIMING 66 608.42 ms 688.88 ms 781.68 ms 781.68 ms

 Conclusion

This post showed how AWS Lambda SnapStart, enhanced by CRaC runtime hooks, unlocks granular control over cold-start optimization for Java applications through two distinct priming strategies:

  • Invoke Priming: improves performance by executing critical endpoints during snapshot creation, ideal for idempotent workflows.
  • Class Priming: preloads classes without triggering business logic, mitigating side-effect risks.

To implement these optimization techniques in your applications evaluate your use case and opt for the optimal priming approach. Track latency reductions and resource utilization of your application via Amazon CloudWatch metrics to quantify performance improvements. By integrating these strategies, developers can achieve sub-second cold starts while maintaining the scalability and cost-efficiency of serverless architecture using Java.

To dive deeper, check out the GitHub repository with the full example code, including setup instructions and reusable patterns you can adapt to your own projects. For more examples of Java applications running on AWS Lambda, visit serverlessland.com and explore a wide range of resources, tutorials, and real-world use cases.

Melting the ice — How Natural Intelligence simplified a data lake migration to Apache Iceberg

Post Syndicated from Yonatan Dolan original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/big-data/melting-the-ice-how-natural-intelligence-simplified-a-data-lake-migration-to-apache-iceberg/

This post is co-written with Haya Axelrod Stern, Zion Rubin and Michal Urbanowicz from Natural Intelligence.

Many organizations turn to data lakes for the flexibility and scale needed to manage large volumes of structured and unstructured data. However, migrating an existing data lake to a new table format such as Apache Iceberg can bring significant technical and organizational challenges

Natural Intelligence (NI) is a world leader in multi-category marketplaces. NI’s leading brands, Top10.com and BestMoney.com, help millions of people worldwide to make informed decisions every day. Recently, NI embarked on a journey to transition their legacy data lake from Apache Hive to Apache Iceberg.

In this blog post, NI shares their journey, the innovative solutions developed, and the key takeaways that can guide other organizations considering a similar path.

This article details NI’s practical approach to this complex migration, focusing less on Apache Iceberg’s technical specifications, but rather on the real-world challenges and solutions encountered during the transition to Apache Iceberg, a challenge that many organizations are grappling with.

Why Apache Iceberg?

The architecture at NI followed the commonly used medallion architecture, comprised of a bronze-silver-gold layered framework, shown in the figure that follows:

  • Bronze layer: Unprocessed data from various sources, stored in its raw format in Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3), ingested through Apache Kafka brokers.
  • Silver layer: Contains cleaned and enriched data, processed using Apache Flink.
  • Gold layer: Holds analytics-ready datasets designed for business intelligence (BI) and reporting, produced using Apache Spark pipelines, and consumed by services such as Snowflake, Amazon Athena, Tableau, and Apache Druid. The data is stored in Apache Parquet format with AWS Glue Catalog providing metadata management.

BDB4681-Arch1

While this architecture supported NI analytical needs, it lacked the flexibility required for a truly open and adaptable data platform. The gold layer was coupled only with query engines that supported Hive and AWS Glue Data Catalog. It was possible to use Amazon Athena however Snowflake required maintaining another catalog in order to query those external tables. This issue made it difficult to evaluate or adopt alternative tools and engines without costly data duplication, query rewrite data catalog synchronization. As business scaled, NI needed a data platform that could seamlessly support multiple query engines simultaneously with a single data catalog and avoiding any vendor lock-in.

The power of Apache Iceberg

Apache Iceberg emerged as the perfect solution—a flexible, open table format that aligns with NI’s approach of Data Lake First. Iceberg offers several critical advantages such as ACID transactions, schema evolution, time travel, performance improvements and more. But the key strategic benefits lay in the ability to support multiple query engines simultaneously. It also has the following advantages:

  • Decoupling of storage and compute: The open table format enables you to separate the storage layer from the query engine, allowing an easy swap and support for multiple engines concurrently without data duplication.
  • Vendor independence: As an open table format, Apache Iceberg prevents vendor lock-in, giving you the flexibility to adapt to changing analytics needs.
  • Vendor adoption: Apache Iceberg is widely supported by major platforms and tools, providing seamless integration and long-term ecosystem compatibility.

By transitioning to Iceberg, NI was able to embrace a truly open data platform, providing long-term flexibility, scalability, and interoperability while maintaining a unified source of truth for all analytics and reporting needs.

Challenges faced

Migrating a live production data lake to Iceberg was challenging because of operational complexities and legacy constraints. The data service at NI runs hundreds of Spark and machine learning pipelines, manages thousands of tables, and supports over 400 dashboards—all operating 24/7. Any migration would need to be done without production interruptions; and coordinating such a migration while operations continue seamlessly was daunting.

NI needed to accommodate diverse users with varying requirements and timelines from data engineers to data analysts all the way to data scientists and BI teams.

Adding to the challenge were legacy constraints. Some of the existing tools didn’t fully support Iceberg, so there was a need to maintain Hive-backed tables for compatibility. As NI realized that not all consumers could adopt Iceberg immediately. A plan was required to allow for incremental transitions without downtime or disruption to ongoing operations.

Key pillars for migration

To help ensure a smooth and successful transition, six critical pillars were defined:

  • Support ongoing operations: Maintain uninterrupted compatibility with existing systems and workflows during the migration process.
  • User transparency: Minimize disruption for users by preserving existing table names and access patterns.
  • Gradual consumer migration: Allow consumers to adopt Iceberg at their own pace, avoiding a forced, simultaneous switchover.
  • ETL flexibility: Migrate ETL pipelines to Iceberg without imposing constraints on development or deployment.
  • Cost effectiveness: Minimize storage and compute duplication and overhead during the migration period.
  • Minimize maintenance: Reduce the operational burden of managing dual table formats (Hive and Iceberg) during the transition.

Evaluating traditional migration approaches

Apache Iceberg supports two main approaches for migration: In-place and rewrite-based migration.

In-place migration

How it works: Converts an existing dataset into an Iceberg table without duplicating data by creating Iceberg metadata on top of the existing files while preserving their layout and format.

Advantages:

  • Cost-effective in terms of storage (no data duplication)
  • Simplified implementation
  • Maintains existing table names and locations
  • No data movement and minimal compute requirements, translating into lower cost

Disadvantages:

  • Downtime required: All write operations must be paused during conversion, which was unacceptable in NI cases because data and analytics are considered mission critical and run 24/7
  • No gradual adoption: All consumers must switch to Iceberg simultaneously, increasing the risk of disruption
  • Limited validation: No opportunity to validate data before cutover; rollback requires restoring from backups
  • Technical constraints: Schema evolution during migration can be challenging; data type incompatibilities can halt the entire process

Rewrite-based migration

How it works: Rewrite-based migration in Apache Iceberg involves creating a new Iceberg table by rewriting and reorganizing existing dataset files into Iceberg’s optimized format and structure for improved performance and data management.

Advantages:

  • Zero downtime during migration
  • Supports gradual consumer migration
  • Enables thorough validation
  • Simple rollback mechanism

Disadvantages:

  • Resource overhead: Double storage and compute costs during migration
  • Maintenance complexity: Managing two parallel data pipelines increases operational burden
  • Consistency challenges: Maintaining perfect consistency between the two systems is challenging
  • Performance impact: Increased latency because of dual writes; potential pipeline slowdowns

Why neither option alone was good enough

NI decided that neither option could meet all critical requirements:

  • In-place migration fell short because of unacceptable downtime and lack of support for gradual migration.
  • Rewrite-based migration fell short because of prohibitive cost overhead and complex operational management.

This analysis led NI to develop a hybrid approach that combines the advantages of both methods while mitigating and minimizing limitations.

The hybrid solution

The hybrid migration strategy was designed around five foundational elements, using AWS analytical services for orchestration, processing, and state management.

  1. Hive-to-Iceberg CDC: Automatically synchronize Hive tables with Iceberg using a custom change data capture (CDC) process to support existing consumers. Unlike traditional CDC focusing on row-level changes, the process was done at the partition-level to preserve Hive’s behavior of updating tables by overwriting partitions. This helps ensure that data consistency is maintained between Hive and Iceberg without logic changes at the migration phase, making sure that the same data exists on both tables.
  2. Continuous schema synchronization: Schema evolution during the migration introduced maintenance challenges. Automated schema sync processes compared Hive and Iceberg schemas, reconciling differences while maintaining type compatibility.
  3. Iceberg-to-Hive reverse CDC: To enable the data team to transition extract, transform, and load (ETL) jobs to write directly to Iceberg while maintaining compatibility with existing Hive-based processes not yet migrated, a reverse CDC from Iceberg to Hive was implemented. This allowed ETLs to write to Iceberg while maintaining Hive tables for downstream processes that had not yet migrated and still relied on them during the migration period.
  4. Alias management in Snowflake: Snowflake aliases made sure that Iceberg tables retained their original names, making the transition transparent to users. This approach minimized reconfiguration efforts across dependent teams and workflows.
  5. Table replacement: Swap production tables while retaining original names, completing the migration.

Technical deep dive

The migration to from Hive to Iceberg was constructed of several steps:

1. Hive-to-Iceberg CDC pipeline

Objective: Keep Hive and Iceberg tables synchronized without duplicating effort.

The preceding figure demonstrates how every partition written to the Hive table is automatically and transparently copied to the Iceberg table using a CDC process. This process makes sure that both tables are synchronized, enabling a seamless and incremental migration without disrupting downstream systems. NI chose partition-level synchronization because the legacy Hive ETL jobs already wrote updates by overwriting entire partitions and updating the partition location. Adopting that same approach in the CDC pipeline helped ensure that it remained consistent with how data was originally managed, making the migration smoother and avoiding the need to rework row-level logic.

Implementation:

  • To keep Hive and Iceberg tables synchronized without duplicating effort, a streamlined pipeline was implemented. Whenever partitions in Hive tables are updated, the AWS Glue Catalog emits events such as UpdatePartition. Amazon EventBridge captured these events, filtered them for the relevant databases and tables according to the event bridge rule, and triggered an AWS Lambda This function parsed the event metadata and sent the partition updates to an Apache Kafka topic.
  • A Spark job running on Amazon EMR consumed the messages from Kafka, which contained the updated partition details from the Data Catalog events. Using that event metadata, the Spark job queried the relevant Hive table, and wrote it to Iceberg table in Amazon S3 using the Spark Iceberg overwritePartitions API, as shown in the following example:
{
   "id":"10397e54-c049-fc7b-76c8-59e148c7cbfc",
   "detail-type":"Glue Data Catalog Table State Change",
   "source":"aws.glue",
   "time":"2024-10-27T17:16:21Z",
   "region":"us-east-1",
   "detail":{
      "databaseName":"dlk_visitor_funnel_dwh_production",
      "changedPartitions":[
         "2024-10-27"
      ],
      "typeOfChange":"UpdatePartition",
      "tableName":"fact_events"
   }
}
  • By targeting only modified partitions, the pipeline (shown in the following figure) significantly reduced the need for costly full-table rewrites. Iceberg’s robust metadata layers, including snapshots and manifest files, were seamlessly updated to capture these changes, providing efficient and accurate synchronization between Hive and Iceberg tables.

2. Iceberg-to-Hive reverse CDC pipeline

Objective: Support Hive consumers while allowing ETL pipelines to transition to Iceberg.

BDB4681-arch4

The preceding figure shows the reverse process, where every partition written to the Iceberg table is automatically and transparently copied to the Hive table using a CDC mechanism. This process helps ensure synchronization between the two systems, enabling seamless data updates for legacy systems that still rely on Hive while transitioning to Iceberg.

Implementation:

Synchronizing data from Iceberg tables back to Hive tables presented a different challenge. Unlike Hive tables, Data Catalog doesn’t track partition updates for Iceberg tables because partitions in Iceberg are managed internally and not within the catalog. This meant NI couldn’t rely on Glue Catalog events to detect partition changes.

To address this, NI implemented a solution similar to the previous flow but adapted to Iceberg’s architecture. Apache Spark was used to query Iceberg’s metadata tables—specifically the snapshots and entries tables—to identify the partitions modified since the last synchronization. The query used was:

SELECT e.data_file.partition, MAX(s.committed_at) AS last_modified_time 
FROM $target_table.snapshots JOIN $target_table.entries e ON s.snapshot_id = e.snapshot_id 
WHERE s.committed_at &amp;gt; '$last_sync_time' 
GROUP BY e.data_file.partition;

This query returned only the partitions that had been updated since the last synchronization, enabling it to focus exclusively on the changed data. Using this information, similar to the earlier process, a Spark job retrieved the updated partitions from Iceberg and wrote them back to the corresponding Hive table, providing seamless synchronization between both tables.

3. Continuous schema synchronization

Objective: Automate schema updates to maintain consistency across Hive and Iceberg.

BDB4681-arch5

The preceding figure shows how the automatic schema sync process helps ensure consistency between Hive and Iceberg tables schemas by automatically synchronizing schema changes. In this example adding the Channel column, minimizing manual work and double maintenance during the extended migration period.

 Implementation:

To handle schema changes between Hive and Iceberg, a process was implemented to detect and reconcile differences automatically. When a schema change happens in a Hive table, Data Catalog emits an UpdateTable event. This event triggers a Lambda function (routed through EventBridge), which retrieves the updated schema from Data Catalog for the Hive table and compares it to the Iceberg schema. It’s important to call out that in NI’s setup, schema changes originate from Hive because the Iceberg table is hidden behind aliases across the system. Because Iceberg is primarily used for Snowflake, a one-way sync from Hive to Iceberg is sufficient. As a result, there is no mechanism to detect or handle schema changes made directly in Iceberg, because they aren’t needed in the current workflow.

During the schema reconciliation (shown in the following figure), data types are normalized to help ensure compatibility—for example, converting Hive’s VARCHAR to Iceberg’s STRING. Any new fields or type changes are validated and applied to the Iceberg schema using a Spark job running on Amazon EMR. Amazon DynamoDB stores schema synchronization checkpoints which allow tracking changes over time and maintain consistency between the Hive and Iceberg schemas.

BDB4681-arch6

By automating this schema synchronization, maintenance overhead was significantly reduced and freed developers from manually keeping schemas in sync, making the long migration period significantly more manageable.

The preceding figure depicts an automated workflow to maintain schema consistency between Hive and Iceberg tables. AWS Glue captures table state change events from Hive, which trigger an EventBridge event. The event invokes a Lambda function that fetches metadata from DynamoDB and compares schemas fetched from AWS Glue for both Hive and Iceberg tables. If a mismatch is detected, the schema in Iceberg is updated to help ensure alignment, minimizing manual intervention and supporting smooth operation during the migration.

4. Alias management in Snowflake

Objective: Enable Snowflake consumers to adopt Iceberg without changing query references.

The preceding figure shows how Snowflake aliases enable seamless migration by mapping queries like SELECT platform, COUNT(clickouts) FROM funnel.clickouts to Iceberg tables in the Glue Catalog. Even with suffixes added during the Iceberg migration, existing queries and workflows remain unchanged, minimizing disruption for BI tools and analysts.

Implementation:

To help ensure a seamless experience for BI tools and analysts during the migration, Snowflake aliases were used to map external tables to the Iceberg metadata stored in Data Catalog. By assigning aliases that matched the original Hive table names, existing queries and reports were preserved without interruption. For example, an external table was created in Snowflake and aliased it to the original table name, as shown in the following query:

CREATE OR REPLACE ICEBERG TABLE dlk_visitor_funnel_dwh_production.aggregated_cost 
EXTERNAL_VOLUME = 's3_dlk_visitor_funnel_dwh_production_iceberg_migration' 
CATALOG = 'glue_dlk_visitor_funnel_dwh_production_iceberg_migration' 
CATALOG_TABLE_NAME = 'aggregated_cost'; 
ALTER ICEBERG TABLE dlk_visitor_funnel_dwh_production.aggregated_cost REFRESH;

When migration was completed, a simple change back to the alias was done to point to the new location or schema, making the transition seamless and minimizing any disruption to user workflows.

5. Table replacement

Objective: When all ETLs and related data workflows were successfully transitioned to use Apache Iceberg’s capabilities, and everything was functioning correctly with the synchronization flow, it was time to move on to the final phase of the migration. The primary objective was to maintain the original table names, avoiding the use of any prefixes like those employed in the earlier, intermediate migration steps. This helped ensure that the configuration remained tidy and free from unnecessary naming complications.

The preceding figure shows the table replacement to complete the migration, where Hive on Amazon EMR was used to register Parquet files as Iceberg tables while preserving original table names and avoiding data duplication, helping to ensure a seamless and tidy migration.

Implementation:

One of the challenges was that renaming tables isn’t possible within AWS Glue, which prevents the use of a straightforward renaming approach for the existing synchronization flow tables. In addition, AWS Glue doesn’t support the Migrate procedure, which creates Iceberg metadata on top of the existing data file while preserving the original table name. The strategy to overcome this limitation was to use a Hive metastore on an Amazon EMR cluster. By using Hive on Amazon EMR, NI was able to create the final tables with their original names because it operates in a separate metastore environment, giving the flexibility to define any required schema and table names without interference.

The add_files procedure was used to methodically register all the existing Parquet files, thus constructing all necessary metadata within Hive. This was a crucial step, because it helped ensure that all data files were appropriately cataloged and linked within the metastore.

The preceding figure shows the transition of a production table to Iceberg by using the add_files procedure to register existing Parquet files and create Iceberg metadata. This helped ensure a smooth migration while preserving the original data and avoiding duplication.

This setup allowed the use of existing Parquet files without duplicating data, thus saving resources. Although the sync flow used separate buckets for the final architecture, NI chose to maintain the original buckets and cleaned the intermediate files. This resulted in a different folder structure on Amazon S3. The historical data had subfolders for each partition under the root table directory, while the new Iceberg data organizes subfolders within a data folder. This difference was acceptable to avoid data duplication and preserve the original Amazon S3 buckets.

Technical recap

The AWS Glue Data Catalog served as the primary source of truth for schema and table updates, with Amazon EventBridge capturing Data Catalog events to trigger synchronization workflows. AWS Lambda parsed event metadata and managed schema synchronization, while Apache Kafka buffered events for real-time processing. Apache Spark on Amazon EMR handled data transformations and incremental updates, and Amazon DynamoDB maintained state, including synchronization checkpoints and table mappings. Finally, Snowflake seamlessly consumed Iceberg tables via aliases without disrupting existing workflows.

Migration outcome

The migration was completed with zero downtime; continuous operations were maintained throughout the migration, supporting hundreds of pipelines and dashboards without interruption. The migration was done with a cost optimized mindset with incremental updates and partition-level synchronization that minimized the usage of compute and storage resources. Lastly, NI Established a modern, vendor-neutral platform that enables scaling their evolving analytics and machine learning needs. It enables seamless integration with multiple compute and query engines, supporting flexibility and further innovation.

Conclusion

Natural intelligence migration to Apache Iceberg was a pivotal step in modernizing the company’s data infrastructure. By adopting a hybrid strategy and using the power of event-driven architectures, NI helped ensure a seamless transition that balanced innovation with operational stability. The journey underscored the importance of careful planning, understanding the data ecosystem, and focusing on an organization-first approach.

Above all, business was kept in focus and continuity prioritized the user experience. By doing so, NI unlocked the flexibility and scalability of their data lake while minimizing disruption, allowing teams to use cutting-edge analytics capabilities, positioning the company at the forefront of modern data management and readiness for the future.

If you’re considering an Apache Iceberg migration or facing similar data infrastructure challenges, we encourage you to explore the possibilities. Embrace open formats, use automation, and design with your organization’s unique needs in mind. The journey might be complex, but the rewards in scalability, flexibility, and innovation are well worth the effort. You can use the AWS prescriptive guide to help learn more about how to best use Apache Iceberg for your organization


About the Authors

Yonatan DolanYonatan Dolan is a Principal Analytics Specialist at Amazon Web Services. Yonatan is an Apache Iceberg evangelist.

Haya Stern is a Senior Director of Data at Natural Intelligence. She leads the development of NI’s large-scale data platform, with a focus on enabling analytics, streamlining data workflows, and improving dev efficiency. In the past year, she led the successful migration from the previous data architecture to a modern lake house based on Apache Iceberg and Snowflake.

Zion Rubin is a Data Architect at Natural Intelligence with ten years of experience architecting large‑scale big‑data platforms, now focused on developing intelligent agent systems that turn complex data into real‑time business insight.

Michał Urbanowicz is a Cloud Data Engineer at Natural Intelligence with expertise in migrating data warehouses and implementing robust retention, cleanup, and monitoring processes to ensure scalability and reliability. He also develops automations that streamline and support campaign management operations in cloud-based environments.

Maintaining spare capacity during host failures on AWS Outposts with dynamic monitoring

Post Syndicated from Adam Duffield original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/compute/maintaining-spare-capacity-during-host-failures-on-aws-outposts-with-dynamic-monitoring/

AWS Outposts Rack is a fully managed service that extends AWS infrastructure, services, and APIs to user managed locations. Although you may be used to the seemingly infinite capacity that AWS offers in region, those using Outposts rack for their workloads are limited to the capacity that they order. You will need to closely manage and monitor usage of the available resources as part of capacity management. It is also important to make sure that there is sufficient available capacity in the event of an impactful hardware failure. Although spare capacity is often planned for in the initial Outposts rack configuration order, scaling events and deployments of new workloads can often lead to capacity shortages that only become visible during a failure event.

In this post, we review best practices for capacity management and fault tolerance with Outposts rack followed by an example of how the Outposts API can be used to build an automated monitoring and alerting system to highlight potential resiliency issues.

Planning for failures

The AWS Outposts High Availability Design and Architecture whitepaper discusses the principals of capacity planning within Outposts rack, such as how instance families are mapped to hosts through capacity planning.

When looking to determine resiliency levels, we refer to having N+M capacity, where N represents the number of deployed hosts of a particular instance family (such as C5 or M5), and M represents the number of hosts that can fail while still meeting workload capacity requirements.

The capacity configuration that is applied to each host will impact the necessary recovery process in the event of a failure, depending on the number of configured or running instances. With this in mind, there are three potential recovery scenarios that can apply in the event of a host hardware failure:

  1. Sufficient capacity exists within all instance pools to tolerate the failure of M hosts. This is the most ideal operational position to be in because, in the event of a failure, instances can be recovered to free capacity quickly either through automated features, such as EC2 Auto Scaling groups and instance recovery, or through manual stop/start of the instances.
  2. The required instance type is not available within the available instance pools, however, there is sufficient vCPU available to execute capacity tasks to create the required instance capacity to fulfill the shortfall. As this requires changes to existing capacity, this results in a longer recovery time overall
  3. Insufficient capacity within the Outpost at both the instance pool and vCPU level means that either workloads need to be stopped to fit within the available capacity, or more Outpost hardware needs to be added. This further extends the recovery time for workloads.

Consider the following example of an Outpost configured with four M5 hosts that have been designed with an N+1 resiliency model.

Figure 1: Example configuration with sufficient instance pool capacity

In this example, there are five configured instance pools with the following usages:

Instance size Total instance pool capacity Total free instance pool capacity Max configured instances per host
M5.large 16 6 4
M5.xlarge 8 3 2
M5.2xlarge 8 3 2
M5.4xlarge 8 3 2
M5.8xlarge 4 2 1

For all instance pools, the number of available instances is greater than the maximum number of instances configured on a single host. Therefore, in the event of a failure of any host, instances can be moved to the existing available capacity without any reconfiguration.

We can consider another scenario of running instances on the same set of hosts:

Figure 2: Example configuration with sufficient vCPU capacity

With the usage as shown, four of the configured instance pools have sufficient available capacity. However, the m5.4xlarge instance pool only has one available instance placement, resulting in no tolerance to a single host failure. A single m5 host has a total of 96 vCPU, and in this example the overall capacity of the available slots is 156 vCPU. This means that, with the execution of a capacity task to rebalance the available slots, instances could be restarted after a host failure.

Automating a capacity observability solution

With the release of the capacity task functionality for Outposts, details of instance placement and slot configuration per host are now available within both the AWS Management Console and through the API. With the addition of capacity tasks for Outposts, an automated solution can be created to query this data and provide notifications when the N+M resiliency requirements for your workloads are at risk.

The following diagram shows an example solution to achieve this, with the sample code provided in the AWS Samples GitHub repository. The solution is deployed using an AWS Serverless Application Model (AWS SAM) template.

Figure 3: Sample code architectural diagram

  1. Amazon EventBridge scheduler initiates an AWS Lambda function on a user defined time basis.
  2. The Lambda function evaluates the Outpost rack capacity, creates and updates Amazon CloudWatch alarms, and initiates regular reporting.
  3. An Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS) Topic sends the report to user defined endpoints such as email or Slack.
  4. CloudWatch alarms continually monitor for changes to Outpost capacity.
  5. In the event of alarm thresholds being breached, a Lambda function is invoked to send notifications via SNS to the user defined endpoints.

At the core of the solution are two Lambda functions:

Monitoring stack manager: This Lambda function sets up the dynamic monitoring of the desired N+M resiliency level. It achieves this by creating and updating CloudWatch alarms based on the current capacity configuration of the Outposts being monitored, and the capacity usage for each instance family and type. The function generates detailed reports for each Outpost, identifying any potential resiliency issues for each instance family based on the M value that is specified at the time of deployment.

The detailed report, which is issued via the configured SNS topic, starts with an overall summary that clearly details the status of each instance family and the resiliency status.

Figure 4: Resiliency report summary section

Following the overall summary section, a more detailed analysis is provided for each instance family, looking at resiliency from both instance type and vCPU capacity perspectives. As part of this detailed analysis, the level of risk for each capacity pool is provided alongside a review of available instance capacity and suggested mitigation options.

Figure 5: Resiliency report instance pool analysis section

Figure 6: Resiliency report vCPU analysis section

This summary report is generated on every execution of the Monitoring Stack Manager function, with the default configuration that is triggered by the EventBridge Scheduler set to daily.

Process alarm: When the alarm that is configured by the Monitoring Stack Manager Lambda triggers, the Process Alarm Lambda analyzes Outpost capacity, checking for available free vCPUs within the hosts running the affected instance family. Then, a report is sent via SNS to immediately draw attention to the capacity risk, providing guidance if the resiliency risk can be mitigated through the application of an alternate capacity configuration.

Figure 7: Resiliency alarm notification report

Similar to the report generated by the Monitoring Stack Manager function, a more detailed breakdown of the capacity issue is provided that allows for easy identification of any necessary follow up actions. These actions are recommendations for manual resolution of the issue and require you to take action to implement.

When the available capacity returns to a level that matches the N+M resiliency requirements you defined, a further notification report is sent to confirm this, and the alarm is reset.

You may also prefer to integrate notifications into platforms such as Slack or Microsoft Teams. One option for this is to use a Lambda function to rewrite the Amazon SNS notification to publish the message through a Webhook. For more information on this, go to How do I use webhooks to publish Amazon SNS messages to Amazon Chime, Slack, or Microsoft Teams?. Alternatively, for sending messages to Slack, users can use Slack’s email-to-channel integration, which allows Slack to accept email messages and forward them to a Slack channel. For more information, go to Configure Amazon SNS to send messages for alerts to other destinations.

Considerations for deploying this solution

The sample solution provided has been designed to work for users who are operating Outposts at any scale. However, there are some considerations for deploying:

  1. The solution is deployed within the AWS account that owns the Outpost, rather than workload/consumer accounts that might be using Outposts resources through AWS Resource Access Manager (AWS RAM)
  2. The deployment is AWS Region-specific. Therefore, it would need to be deployed in each AWS Region you’re using Outposts in.
  3. Each stack deployment supports dedicated N+M configuration monitoring, allowing you to create separate deployments to match the desired resilience requirements across multiple Outposts.

Cleaning up

Because this solution is implemented through AWS SAM, the only clean up required is to execute the AWS SAM deployment using the cleanup parameter as documented in the code repository readme file.

Conclusion

In this post, we reviewed how to calculate N+M resilience for Outposts rack deployments, and provided a sample solution that can dynamically monitor and report on capacity constraints. Making sure that there is sufficient available capacity within an Outpost rack to tolerate failures is critical to running resilient applications and minimizing any potential downtime. Combining good capacity management practices with service functionality, such as EC2 Auto Scaling, automatic instance recovery, and placement groups, gives you several options to make sure workloads can continue to run even during failure events. If you need any assistance calculating your Outposts rack resiliency, or further information on deploying and running fault tolerant workloads, reach out to your AWS Account team.

Streamlining trace sampling behavior for AWS Lambda functions with AWS X-Ray

Post Syndicated from Joshua Smith original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/compute/streamlining-trace-sampling-behavior-for-aws-lambda-functions-with-aws-x-ray/

Effective tracing enables developers and operators to quickly identify performance bottlenecks, troubleshoot issues across service boundaries, and make sure of optimal end-user experiences. This makes it crucial for maintaining and optimizing distributed serverless applications. This post explores the importance of distributed tracing for operating serverless applications and announces an important update to tracing behavior for AWS Lambda, which streamlines how trace context is handled in PassThrough mode. This blog post will demonstrate how this change gives you better control over how your Lambda functions handle tracing with AWS X-Ray through practical examples. Whether you’re building new applications or operating existing ones, this update helps you achieve more predictable and efficient tracing across your serverless applications built using Lambda.

Overview

Distributed serverless applications spanning numerous AWS services require robust monitoring as they scale. Traditional troubleshooting approaches fall short due to Lambda’s ephemeral nature, making it difficult for development teams to track requests across components, understand performance bottlenecks, and optimize costs by eliminating unnecessary function invocations. Without end-to-end visibility, production issues become increasingly time-consuming to resolve.

X-Ray addresses these observability challenges by providing powerful distributed tracing capabilities that help developers understand how their Lambda functions interact with other AWS services and identify performance issues. As serverless architectures grow in complexity, having fine-grained control over tracing behavior becomes crucial for maintaining efficient and cost-effective observability strategies that enable teams to effectively operate production workloads.

Lambda and X-Ray have steadily enhanced tracing capabilities in recent years to improve observability for serverless applications. In November 2022, X-Ray introduced trace linking between Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) and Lambda, enabling end-to-end tracing for event-driven applications. In February 2023, X-Ray added active tracing support for Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS), allowing you to trace messages that flow through SNS topics to Lambda functions. In May 2023, X-Ray added tracing support to SnapStart-enabled Lambda functions, helping you troubleshoot and optimize the performance of latency-sensitive Java applications built using SnapStart-enabled functions. In November 2023, Lambda launched a unified experience in the Lambda console that brings together metrics, logs, and traces in a single view, allowing you to more directly troubleshoot and optimize your functions.

Building upon these enhancements, Lambda has now rolled out streamlined trace sampling behavior, which gives you better control over how your functions handle tracing with X-Ray. This launch makes an important change to tracing behavior in Lambda when the tracing configuration is set to PassThrough mode. With this launch, Lambda propagates the tracing context as is without any modifications in PassThrough mode. This means that Lambda won’t create any trace segments or subsegments for functions set to PassThrough mode, even if the incoming invocation contains a decision to sample the request. However, Lambda service does propagate the tracing context as received by the function.

This change to the X-Ray PassThrough mode for Lambda gives you more control and predictability over your tracing configuration. This enables you to optimize your tracing strategy and better understand the performance and behavior of your serverless applications. This post shows three different scenarios to demonstrate the new tracing behavior.

Understanding the Lambda/X-Ray tracing behavior: before and after

Tracing in Lambda with X-Ray is a powerful tool for gaining insights into the performance and behavior of serverless applications. Enabling tracing allows you to identify bottlenecks, troubleshoot issues, and optimize your Lambda functions. Lambda supports two tracing modes for X-Ray: Active and PassThrough. With Active tracing, Lambda automatically creates trace segments for function invocations and sends them to X-Ray. On the other hand, PassThrough mode propagates the tracing context to downstream services.

Previously, if you enabled tracing in an upstream service that invokes your function, Lambda would follow this sampling decision and send traces to X-Ray automatically, even in the case where the Lambda function was configured to use PassThrough mode. The following figure shows this process. This behavior could result in unexpected trace segments, which could become an overhead, particularly in high throughput scenarios.

Figure 1. Previous behavior: Lambda sends traces to X-Ray even when function tracing configuration is set to PassThrough

The updated X-Ray PassThrough mode for Lambda provides a more intuitive and consistent tracing experience. You can now expect Lambda to respect the incoming tracing context (if it exists) and propagate it without any modifications. In turn, downstream services can make their own tracing decisions based on their configuration. The following figure shows this updated behavior.

Figure 2. New behavior: When function tracing configuration is set to PassThrough, Lambda doesn’t send traces to X-Ray or modify sampling decision

PassThrough tracing configuration with upstream sampling

To configure your Lambda function to use PassThrough tracing mode in the console, complete the following steps:

  1. In the Lambda console, navigate to your function.
  2. On the Configuration tab, choose Monitoring and operations tools in the left pane.
  3. Confirm that X-Ray active tracing shows as Not enabled. If it’s enabled, then choose Edit.
  4. Under X-Ray, turn off Active tracing, then choose Save, as shown in the following figure.

    Figure 3. Lambda console showing function with active tracing disabled

You can also make use of the AWS Command Line Interface (AWS CLI) to achieve the aforementioned setting:

aws lambda update-function-configuration --function-name YOUR_FUNCTION_NAME --tracing-config Mode=PassThrough

This configuration allows your Lambda function to propagate the tracing context received from the upstream service without any changes. If you were previously using this configuration, then you no longer see trace segments created by the Lambda function on the X-Ray console. This configuration is useful when you want to propagate the tracing context without generating trace segments, in scenarios that need optimizing for tracing costs or overhead. The following figure shows the workflow.

Figure 4. A tracing map that shows the UpstreamFunction Lambda function isn’t displayed on the trace map, because it’s configured to use PassThrough tracing mode after this change

If you want to see trace segments for your Lambda function, then you need to set the tracing mode to Active.

Active tracing configuration

When you configure your Lambda function to use active tracing mode, and if there is no sampling decision from the upstream request, Lambda samples requests at the rate of one request per second and 5% of further requests. If there is a decision not to sample, then Lambda respects this sampling decision.

To configure your Lambda function to use active tracing mode, complete the following steps:

  1. On the Lambda console, navigate to the AWS X-Ray section on the Lambda function’s configuration page, as described in the previous section.
  2. Turn on Active tracing, then choose Save, as shown in the following figure.

    Figure 5: Lambda console showing active tracing enabled

You can also use the AWS CLI to set this configuration:

aws lambda update-function-configuration --function-name YOUR_FUNCTION_NAME --tracing-config Mode=Active

With active tracing mode, you can always see traces for sampled requests for your Lambda function on the X-Ray console. This mode is particularly useful when you want to have complete visibility into the performance and behavior of your Lambda function. The following figure shows the workflow for upstream and downstream Lambda functions with active tracing enabled.

Figure 6. A trace map showing both the UpstreamFunction and DownstreamFunction Lambda functions. This is because both functions have active tracing enabled.

The following screenshot shows a full trace corresponding to the preceding trace workflow with both upstream and downstream Lambda functions. Detailed insights gained from comprehensive tracing can be invaluable for troubleshooting, performance optimization, and understanding the end-to-end behavior of your serverless application.

Figure 7. A full trace corresponding to the preceding trace map with both upstream and downstream Lambda functions

PassThrough tracing configuration without upstream sampling

When you configure your Lambda function to use PassThrough tracing mode, and the upstream service has sampling turned off, Lambda continues to propagate the tracing context without any modifications, and without generating traces.

To configure your Lambda function to use PassThrough tracing mode, complete the following steps:

  1. On the Lambda console, navigate to the AWS X-Ray section on the Lambda function’s configuration page.
  2. Under X-Ray, turn off Active tracing, then choose Save, as shown in the following figure.

    Figure 8. Lambda console showing active tracing disabled

This configuration remains the same in the updated PassThrough configuration and is particularly useful when you want to allow downstream services to make their own tracing decisions.

Conclusion

The new streamlined trace sampling behavior for AWS Lambda functions provides you with more control and flexibility over insights into your applications. Whether you choose to use PassThrough mode with upstream sampling on or off, or active tracing mode, you can now configure your Lambda functions to handle tracing in a way that best suits your application’s needs.

This update empowers you to optimize your tracing setup, balance tracing costs and benefits, and gain valuable insights into the performance and behavior of your serverless applications.

This change in tracing behavior now applies to all new and existing functions in all AWS Regions where Lambda and AWS X-Ray are available, at no further cost. To learn more about the new tracing sampling behavior for Lambda, see the post Visualize Lambda function invocations using AWS X-Ray.

For more serverless learning resources, visit Serverless Land.

How to help prevent hotlinking using referer checking, AWS WAF, and Amazon CloudFront

Post Syndicated from Alex Smith original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/security/how-to-prevent-hotlinking-by-using-aws-waf-amazon-cloudfront-and-referer-checking/

Note: This post was first published April 21, 2016. The updated version aligns with the latest version of AWS WAF (AWS WAF v2) and includes screenshots that reflect the changes in the AWS console experience.


AWS WAF Classic has been deprecated and will be end-of-life (EOL) in September 2025. This update describes how to use the latest version of AWS WAF (WAFv2) to help prevent hotlinking. Updates have been made to the screenshots to reflect the changes in the AWS Management Console for AWS WAF.

Hotlinking—also known as inline linking—is a form of content leeching where an unauthorized third-party website embeds links to resources originally referenced in a primary site’s HTML. The third-party website doesn’t incur the cost of hosting the content, which means that your website can be charged for the content other sites use. It also results in slow loading times, lost revenue, and potential legal issues.

Now, you can use AWS WAF to help prevent hotlinking. AWS WAF is a web application firewall that’s closely integrated with Amazon CloudFront—a content delivery network (CDN)—and can help protect your web applications from common web exploits that could affect application availability, compromise security, and consume excessive resources. In this blog post, I show you how to help prevent hotlinking by using header inspection in AWS WAF, while still taking advantage of the improved user experience from a CDN such as CloudFront.

Solution overview

You can address hotlinking in various ways. For instance, you can validate the Referer header (sent by a browser to indicate to the server which page the visitor was referred from) at your web server (for example, by using the Apache module mod_rewrite), and either issue a redirect back to your site’s main page or return a 403 Forbidden error to the visitor’s browser.

If you’re using a CDN such as CloudFront to speed up your site’s delivery of content, validating the Referer header at the web server becomes less practical. The CDN stores a copy of your content in the edge of its network of servers, so even if your web server validates the original request’s headers (in this case, the referer), additional requests for that content must be validated by the CDN itself, because they are unlikely to reach the origin web server.

Figure 1 illustrates this process.

Figure 1: Request – response flow showing instances of a cache-miss and a cache-hit

Figure 1: Request – response flow showing instances of a cache-miss and a cache-hit

The process shown in Figure 1 is as follows:

  1. A request is received from a user client (1) at a CloudFront edge location (2).
  2. The edge location attempts to return a cached copy of the file requested. This request, if fulfilled from the cache, is considered a cache hit.
    1. In the case of a cache miss—when the content is either not in the edge or is not valid (for example, if the content is out of date)—the request is forwarded to the origin (3) (such as an Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) bucket) for a new copy of the object.
    2. In the case of a cache hit, the origin cannot apply validation logic to the user’s request, because the edge server doesn’t need to contact the origin to fulfil the user’s request.

In the next section, I show you how to inspect the client-request headers using AWS WAF to allow or block requests at the CDN.

Solution implementation—two approaches

This post includes two ways to set up AWS WAF to help prevent hotlinking:

  • Using a separate subdomain: Static files (such as images or styling components) to be protected are moved to a separate subdomain such as static.example.com so that you only need to validate the Referer header.
  • Using the same domain: Static files are located under a directory on the same domain. This solution includes how to extend this example to check for an empty Referer header.

The choice of approach will depend on how your site is structured and the level of protection you want to implement. The first approach enables you to set up a Referer header check to make sure that requests for the images only come from an allowlisted sub-domain, while the second approach has an additional check for an empty Referer header. The second approach extends the first approach and allows for some flexibility for users to share direct links to the image while still preventing unaffiliated third-party sites from embedding the image links on their websites.

Terms

The following list includes key terms used in this post:

  • AWS WAF configurations consist of a web access control list (web ACL), associated with a given CloudFront distribution.
  • Each web ACL is a collection of one or more rules, and each rule can have one or more match conditions.
  • Match conditions are made up of one or more filters, which inspect components of the request (such as its headers or URI) to match for certain conditions.
  • Case-sensitivity: HTTP header names are case-insensitive. Referer and referer point to the same HTTP header. HTTP header values, however, are case-sensitive.

Prerequisites

You must have a CloudFront distribution set up before configuring an AWS WAF web ACL. For information about how to set up a CloudFront distribution with an S3 bucket as an origin, see Configure distributions.

Approach 1: A separate subdomain

In this example, you create an AWS WAF rule set that contains a single rule with a single match condition, which in turn has a single filter. The match condition checks the Referer header and verifies that it contains a given value. If the request matches the condition specified in the rule, the traffic is allowed. Otherwise, the AWS WAF rule blocks the traffic.

For this example, because all the static files are on a separate subdomain (static.example.com) accessed only from the site example.com, you will block hotlinking for any file that don’t have a referer that ends with example.com.

Use the following steps to set this up using the AWS WAF console.

Step 1: Create and name a new web ACL

  1. Sign in to the AWS WAF console.
  2. If you have not created a web ACL before, Choose Create web ACL on the AWS WAF console landing page.
  3. Because you want to associate the web ACL with a CloudFront distribution, select Amazon CloudFront distributions as the Resource type.
    1. Enter a Name for the web ACL that you’re creating. For this example, I used the name sample-webacl. The page will automatically populate an associated Amazon CloudWatch metric name. CloudWatch is a monitoring service that allows you to gather and report on metrics of various services. This CloudWatch metric can be used later to report on how your newly created AWS WAF configuration is being used.
    2. After you have supplied the name of the web ACL, you can select the available AWS resources to be protected by this web ACL. In this example, you will fill that in later, so leave this field blank for now.
    3. By default, AWS WAF can inspect up to 16 KB of the web request body with additional values of 32, 48, and 64 KB for an additional cost. Leave the web request Body size limit at the default value of 16 KB.
    4. Choose Next.
  4. Figure 2: Describing the web ACL and associating it to resources

    Figure 2: Describing the web ACL and associating it to resources

Step 2: Create a string match condition on Referer header

AWS WAF ACLs can use AWS managed rule groups, rule groups from AWS Marketplace providers, or you can write your own rules and rule groups. For this example, you will create your own rules and rule groups.

  1. In the AWS WAF console, choose Add rules, and select Add my own rules and rule groups to create the string match condition.
    Figure 3: Add rules and rule groups

    Figure 3: Add rules and rule groups

  2. This will bring you to the Rule visual editor page. The default Rule type will be set to Rule builder which you can leave unchanged. In the Rule builder section, select Regular rule.
    Figure 4: Rule type and Rule builder

    Figure 4: Rule type and Rule builder

  3. The next step is to construct a string match condition to match on the Referer header. Under Name, enter a name for the rule, such as Referer-check. Make sure that If a request is set to doesn’t match the statement (NOT). The string match condition is a negative match which means that if the Referer header field value does not match the value specified in the rule, the request will be blocked. This makes sure that requests for static.example.com which only originate from example.com are allowed. In the Statement section, use the following settings:
    1. Inspect: Select Single header.
    2. Header field name: Enter referer as the value.
    3. Match type: Select Exactly matches string.
    4. String to match: Enter example.com as the value.
    5. Text transformation: Select Lowercase. This isn’t required for most modern browsers, but is a good practice because HTTP header field values are case sensitive.
    Figure 5: Rule name and statement

    Figure 5: Rule name and statement

  4. In the Action section, select Block as the Action. Choose Add Rule.
    Figure 6: Rule Action

    Figure 6: Rule Action

    In the preceding rule statement, you’re configuring AWS WAF to inspect a header with the name Referer and checking if the value of the header matches the static string example.com. If the value of the Referer header is not example.com, then the request is blocked.

  5. The next page is Add rules and rule groups. It shows the following attributes of the web ACL:
    1. AWS WAF rules that have been added to the web ACL.
    2. Web ACL capacity units (WCUs).
    3. Default web ACL action.
    4. Token domain list.
    5. Because you’re only adding one rule to this web ACL, choose Next.
      Figure 7: Rules and rule groups, WCUs, and default web ACL action

      Figure 7: Rules and rule groups, WCUs, and default web ACL action

  6. On the next page, you will set the rule priority. Because you added only one rule, you will not need to adjust the rule priority. If there is more than one rule, you can select a particular rule and use the Move up or Move down options to organize the rule order. Choose Next.
    Figure 8: Set rule priority

    Figure 8: Set rule priority

  7. The Configure metrics page details can be left at the default values. Choose Next to proceed to the final step.
    Figure 9: Configure metrics

    Figure 9: Configure metrics

  8. The final step is to review the web ACL details. If you need to change one of the settings of the web ACL, you can choose Edit step for the corresponding step. Choose Create web ACL to finalize creating the AWS WAF web ACL.
    Figure 10: Review and create web ACL

    Figure 10: Review and create web ACL

Step 3: Associate the new rule with the relevant CloudFront distribution

You can now associate AWS resources with the web ACL that you created in the previous steps. In this case, the AWS resource is a CloudFront distribution.

  1. In the AWS WAF console, choose Web ACLs in the navigation pane. Select the web ACL named sample-webacl that you created previously.
    Figure 11: Select a Web ACL to configure

    Figure 11: Select a Web ACL to configure

  2. Choose Add AWS resources.
    Figure 12: Add AWS resources

    Figure 12: Add AWS resources

  3. Eligible AWS resources will be displayed in the pop-up page. Select the CloudFront distribution from the Resources list. Choose Add to associate the ACL sample-webacl with the CloudFront distribution.
    Figure 13: Select CloudFront distribution to associate with sample-webacl

    Figure 13: Select CloudFront distribution to associate with sample-webacl

  4. The next page is the Web ACLs page, which will show the CloudFront distribution selected in the previous step in the Associated AWS resources section.
    Figure 14: Web ACLs and Associated AWS resources

    Figure 14: Web ACLs and Associated AWS resources

Test the referer check rule

You’re ready to test the web ACL that you created by issuing a cURL command from the command line and confirming that the referer check is matched correctly. When you request files without the allowlisted Referer header, the requests are blocked at the CDN. However, valid requests still are allowed through.

When a third party embeds your content (request blocked at the CDN)

» curl –H "Referer: example.net -I https://static.example.com/favicon.ico
« HTTP/1.1 403 Forbidden

When you embed your content (request allowed through the CDN)

» curl –H "Referer: example.com -I https://static.example.com/favicon.ico
« HTTP/1.1 200 OK

Note: With Approach 1, you must make the request with an allowlisted Referer header. In this example, all paths are filtered.

Approach 2: All content under the same domain, with filtering by path

In the second approach, you allow a blank Referer header and filter by a given URL path. To do this, you will create an AWS WAF web ACL that contains multiple rules with additional match conditions, which in turn are comprised of multiple filters. As with the first approach, the match condition looks at the Referer header; however, you will validate the header in two ways. First, you validate whether the request contains the expected header, and if it does not, you apply the second validation, which checks to see whether it has a URL style Referer header. This enables you to access the assets directly in a browser when the assets aren’t embedded elsewhere in a website but still provides protection against hotlinking.

Accessing an image directly in the browser can be useful in situations where users might want to share the link to the image directly, thus helping to prevent a negative user experience when sharing the image link with other users. This approach makes it an improvement over the first approach where requests for the images must originate from the sub-domain.

You will also validate the path used in the request (in this example /wp-content), which allows AWS WAF to protect individual folders under a single domain name.

Step 1: Decide what to protect

As in the first approach, rather than filter on everything under a domain, you will filter based on the path. In this case, /wp-content. This allows you to protect your uploaded content that sits under /wp-content, but without having to put the content into a separate subdomain.

Step 2: Create and name a new web ACL

You can use the web ACL that you created for Approach 1, or you can repeat Step 1 of Approach 1 to create a new web ACL.

Step 3: Create string match conditions on the referer

For Approach 2, the assumption is that everything exists under a single domain, so instead of using the catch-all example.com, use the more secure https://example.com/ and mark the header as Starting with https://example.com.

Because you’re explicitly filtering on one header, you must watch out for two things:

  • Switching between www.example.com and example.com in your application.
  • Switching between https:// and http:// in your application.

If either of these switches occurs, you will see a 403 Forbidden error returned instead of your embedded files. In this example, all content is delivered directly through https://example.com/.

For this example, you will construct two rules, each of which will contain multiple string match conditions. AWS WAF allows for conditional match conditions within a rule so you can create nested logic statements. For example, a rule evaluation is true if all the statements within a rule statement are evaluated to true.

First rule: Validate a Referer header:

For this rule, you will set the following match conditions and AWS WAF actions:

Rule name: Validate-Referer-header

If Referer header value starts with https://example.com

AND

If URI path starts with /wp-content

THEN

ALLOW request

  1. Open the AWS Management Console for AWS WAF and navigate to WAF & Shield.
  2. Choose Web ACLs in the navigation pane and select Global (CloudFront) as the AWS Region.
    Figure 15: Web ACLs and AWS Regions

    Figure 15: Web ACLs and AWS Regions

  3. The page will refresh to show the Web ACL sample-webacl that you created in the preceding Step 2. Select sample-webacl.
    Figure 16: Web ACLs list

    Figure 16: Web ACLs list

  4. Select the Rules tab.
    Figure 17: Web ACL rules

    Figure 17: Web ACL rules

  5. Choose Add rules and select Add my own rules and rule groups. If you’re reusing the web ACL created in Approach 1, delete the Referer-check rule before adding new rules.
    Figure 18: Add rules and rule groups

    Figure 18: Add rules and rule groups

  6. For Rule type, select Rule builder.
    Figure 19: Rule type

    Figure 19: Rule type

  7. In the Rule section, use the following settings:
    1. Name: Enter Validate-referer-header as the value.
    2. Type: Select Regular rule.
    3. If a request: Select matches all the statements (AND).
    Figure 20: Rule name and match condition

    Figure 20: Rule name and match condition

  8. In the Statement 1 section, use the following settings:
    1. Inspect: Select Single header.
    2. Header field name: Enter referer as the value.
    3. Match type: Select Starts with string.
    4. String to match: Enter https://example.com as the value.
    5. Text transformation: Select Lowercase.
    Figure 21: First string match condition

    Figure 21: First string match condition

  9. Create the second string match condition (Statement 2). For the URL itself, you want to protect content under /wp-content, so you will create a string match to validate that case using the same steps as for the first string match condition, with two changes:
    1. For Inspect, select URI path.
    2. For String to match, enter /wp-content as the value.
    Figure 22: Second string match condition

    Figure 22: Second string match condition

  10. Change the Action to Allow and choose Add Rule at the bottom of the page.
    Figure 23: Set the Action to Allow

    Figure 23: Set the Action to Allow

  11. In the Set rule priority page, choose Save.
    Figure 24: Save the rule

    Figure 24: Save the rule

Second rule: Validate without a Referer header

For the second rule, you will set the following match conditions and rule actions:

Rule name: Validate- with-no-Referer-header

If Referer header contains ://

AND

If URI path starts with /wp-content

THEN

BLOCK request

The second rule is similar to the first rule, but it matches when the Referer header value includes ://. You use this match condition to check whether the Referer header has been set at all. If it has, you block the request.

  1. In the Web ACL page, choose Add rules and select Add my own rules and rule groups to be taken to the Rule type page.
    Figure 25: Create the second rule

    Figure 25: Create the second rule

  2. For Rule type and Rule builder, use the following settings:
    1. Rule type: Select Rule builder.
    2. Name: Enter Validate-with-no_Referer-header as the value.
    3. Type: Select Regular rule.
    4. If a request: Select matches all the statements (AND).
    Figure 26: Set the rule type and matching

    Figure 26: Set the rule type and matching

  3. For Statement 1, use the following settings:
    1. Inspect: Select Single header.
    2. Header field name: Enter Referer as the value.
    3. Match type: Select Contains string.
    4. String to match: Enter ://
    Figure 27: Configure Statement 1

    Figure 27: Configure Statement 1

  4. For Statement 2, use the following settings:
    1. Inspect: Select URI path.
    2. Match type: Select Starts with string.
    3. String to match: Enter /wp-content as the value.
    Figure 28: Configure Statement 2

    Figure 28: Configure Statement 2

  5. For Action, keep the default setting of Block and choose Add Rule.
    Figure 29: Add rule

    Figure 29: Add rule

  6. The resulting Set rule priority page will list the rules in the sample-webacl web ACL and will look like the following figure. It shows the name of the rule, the rule priority, the web capacity units (WCUs) and the AWS WAF response. Choose Save.
    Figure 30: Rule priority and web ACL units used the web ACL.

    Figure 30: Rule priority and web ACL units used the web ACL.

The Rules tab will now show both of the rules that you added with their corresponding AWS WAF actions in addition to the default action of Allow for requests that don’t match one of the rules.

Figure 31: Rules tab of sample-webacl web ACL

Figure 31: Rules tab of sample-webacl web ACL

Step 4: Associate the new rules with the relevant CloudFront distribution

  1. Select the Associated AWS Resources tab and choose Add AWS resources.
    Figure 32: Add AWS resources

    Figure 32: Add AWS resources

  2. Select the relevant CloudFront distribution and choose Add.
    Figure 33: Select the CloudFront distribution

    Figure 33: Select the CloudFront distribution

  3. The web ACLs page will show the CloudFront distribution in the Associated AWS resources tab.
    Figure 34: Associated AWS resources

    Figure 34: Associated AWS resources

Test the rules

Similar to Approach 1, you have filtering at the CDN, but this time the filtering is based on the path and direct linking is allowed (without a Referer header).

You can use cURL to verify that the new AWS WAF web ACL correctly protects your content. Use the –H argument to send a different Referer header to the CloudFront distribution, which allows you to test as if you are embedding the website content in an unauthorized page.

When a third party embeds your content

» curl –H "Referer: https://example.net/" -I https://example.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/03/shareable-image.jpg
« HTTP/1.1 403 Forbidden

When your content is directly linked (with no Referer)

» curl -I https://example.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/03/shareable-image.jpg
« HTTP/1.1 200 OK

When you embed your content

» curl –H "Referer: https://example.com/" -I https://example.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/03/shareable-image.jpg
« HTTP/1.1 200 OK

Conclusion

AWS WAF is a web application firewall that lets you monitor and control the HTTP(S) requests that are forwarded to your protected web application resources. In this post, you saw how to use the AWS WAF custom rule builder feature to prevent content hotlinking to protect your website’s content hosted in an Amazon S3 bucket.

The two approaches demonstrated in this post provide you with ways to implement a robust referer check solution that helps prevent unauthorized third-party websites from linking back to static assets on your website, thus helping to prevent increased bandwidth costs, bad user experience, and degraded performance because of resource leeching. Following the concept of least privilege, you can further restrict the AWS WAF rules to apply only to certain image file extensions (such as .jpg or .png).

While referer checking helps prevent unaffiliated sites from backlinking to your site’s images and benefitting by using your site’s bandwidth, more sophisticated exploits can carefully craft a request to bypass the referer check. Other web request mechanisms, such as web browser plugins, server-to-server requests that forge referer header values, or privacy-based web browsers may also cause inconsistencies in accurately evaluating the referer header value. Be aware of such inconsistencies and consider using additional private content mechanisms such as signed URLs and token authentication.

Web browsers don’t have a mechanism to validate if a Referer header has been tampered with. Referer checking should be implemented as part of a broader web application security strategy by using AWS WAF application protection rules, Bot Control, Fraud Control, and Distributed Denial of Service (DDOS) protection. Effective web traffic monitoring using AWS WAF logs, Amazon CloudWatch metrics, and web ACL traffic dashboards will help ensure that bad actors aren’t bypassing the AWS WAF rules that you have set up to protect your web traffic.

You can use AWS WAF to build on top of the referer check to implement more advanced content protection solutions such as rate-limiting, bot mitigation, and DDOS mitigations to further secure your website against a wide range of exploits.

If you have feedback about this post, submit comments in the Comments section below. If you have questions about this solution or its implementation, start a new thread on the AWS WAF forum.

Alex Smith was the original author of this post in 2016.

Sanchith Kandaka

Sanchith Kandaka

With over 15 years of experience in the Content Delivery and Application Security space, Sanchith is excited about all things edge related. He has worked as a Solutions Architect and a Solutions Engineer and is now a Specialist Solutions Architect at AWS focused on AWS Edge Services and Perimeter Protection services including Amazon CloudFront, AWS WAF, and AWS Shield.

How to support OpenID AuthZEN requests with Amazon Verified Permissions

Post Syndicated from Edward Sun original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/security/how-to-support-openid-authzen-requests-with-amazon-verified-permissions/

OpenID Foundation’s AuthZEN Working Group is currently drafting a new specification (version 1.0, draft 03 at the time of publication) and associated standard mechanisms, protocols, and formats to communicate authorization-related information between components involved in access control and authorization.

Today, we’re publishing an open-source reference implementation demonstrating seamless integration between an AuthZEN-compliant policy enforcement point (PEP) and Amazon Verified Permissions, a fully managed AWS service for storing authorization policies (expressed in Cedar policy language) and evaluating authorization requests at runtime.

What is OpenID AuthZEN specification?

Traditionally, application developers built their own authorization logic within the application code to evaluate access to resources. Reviewing the authorization rules requires reviewing the application code, and changing the authorization rules requires changing and deploying a new version of the application. Customers using this pattern often find it challenging to consistently enforce their authorization rules, track changes to these rules, and update rules as their application evolves.

To solve these challenges, modern application designs have shifted their authorization capabilities and decoupled them from application code. This strategy accelerates application development and grants fine-grained permissions within applications in a more repeatable and dynamic way that developers can apply consistently. Fine-grained permissions are typically designed based on:

  • Subject role assignments following role-based access control (RBAC)
  • Attribute values of the subject or the requested resources following attribute-based access control (ABAC)
  • Relationships between subjects and resources following relationship-based access control (ReBAC)
  • A hybrid model using a combination of the preceding methods

Expressions of these access control rules are called policies, which lead to the policy-based access control (PBAC) approach.

To support these access control approaches, customers implement solutions that follow the guidance of NIST SP 800-162 – A guide to ABAC.

Figure 1: Access control components and interactions

Figure 1: Access control components and interactions

Figure 1 illustrates the architecture of an advanced access control mechanism that consists of several key components that work together to manage and enforce authorization policies.

At the heart of this system is the policy decision point (PDP), which serves as the rules or policy engine. The PDP is responsible for evaluating rules and policies to determine whether a particular access request should be allowed or denied. This component interacts closely with the policy enforcement point (PEP), which acts as the gatekeeper for resource access.

The PEP, typically integrated into your application, receives access requests for subjects (users or systems) and enforces the decisions made by the PDP. It either allows or denies access to the requested resource based on the PDP’s determination.

To make informed decisions, the PDP might need to retrieve additional metadata or attributes. A policy information point (PIP) acts as an interface to external data sources, such as subject attribute and resource attribute stores. These could include databases such as your HR system, providing crucial contextual information to aid in the decision-making process.

The diagram also shows other important elements:

  1. The policy store, which stores the authorization policies.
  2. The policy administration point (PAP), used for managing and updating policies in the policy store.
  3. Environment conditions, which can influence access decisions based on factors like time, location, or system status.

All these components collaborate within the authorization services framework to provide a comprehensive and flexible access control system. The AuthZEN specification provides a standardized way to communicate authorization requests from the PEP to the PDP and to communicate authorization decisions from the PDP to the PEP.

Interoperability with Verified Permissions

Verified Permissions offers organizations a fully managed service that combines the roles of both a PDP engine and a policy store with a PAP. AWS manages the underlying infrastructure, scaling automatically with application demands and maintaining consistent performance across distributed systems.

Verified Permissions uses Cedar, an open-source policy language that brings mathematically provable access control. When integrated into an application’s architecture, Verified Permissions serves as the central decision-making engine for authorization requests sent through its IsAuthorized() API. Verified Permissions evaluates requests against defined policies while considering information such as principal attributes, resource properties, type of action, and environmental conditions. The service also offers the ability to group common authorization requests into one API call and to validate OAuth 2.0 JSON Web Token with the OpenID Connect provider that issued it when provided as principal information.

This reference implementation enables interoperability and seamless integration between OpenID’s AuthZEN protocol and Verified Permissions. It can help you standardize authorization patterns across different services hosted on AWS.

Architecture overview

The architecture of the proposed AuthZEN interface for Verified Permissions is illustrated in Figure 2.

Figure 2: Architecture overview

Figure 2: Architecture overview

The workflow for this architecture is as follows:

  1. The application, serving as PEP, makes an authenticated authorization API call for access requests in AuthZEN-compliant format.
  2. Amazon API Gateway invokes an AWS Lambda authorizer to evaluate the PEP authentication mechanism of the choice.

    Note: In this solution, you will manage access to the API using a secret generated by AWS Secrets Manager. Review your threat model and adopt additional authentication mechanisms that fit your workload such as OAuth 2.0 bearer tokens, client certificate authentication, or AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) temporary credentials.

  3. After successful authentication, API Gateway propagates the request to a Lambda function integration.
  4. The Lambda function queries the entity store, which is a PIP, to retrieve additional metadata and attributes about the entities in the authorization request. The entities are representing the principals and the resources.
  5. The Lambda function integration transforms the authorization requests in AuthZEN format into a Verified Permissions IsAuthorized() formatted request.
  6. Verified Permissions evaluates the authorization request and returns the authorization decision, then a Lambda function transforms the authorization decision to an AuthZEN formatted decision back to the application.

Deploy the solution

You can deploy the authzen-interface-verified-permissions solution by using the AWS Cloud Development Kit (AWS CDK). Solution artifacts are available in the aws-samples/sample-authzen-interface-verified-permissions repository.

For instructions and more information on using the AWS CDK, see Get started with the AWS CDK.

Deploy the policy store

Create a Verified Permissions policy store to store your authorization policies. You can create a new policy store using the AWS Management Console for Verified Permissions or deploy the sample policy store by using AWS CDK. The sample policy store contains Cedar policies and entities to support AuthZEN’s authorization scenarios.

To deploy the policy store stack using AWS CDK:

  1. Navigate to the project root folder, bootstrap your environment, and deploy the policy store by using the following commands. Replace <account-id> and <region> with your AWS account number and the AWS Region you want to deploy in.
    $ cdk bootstrap aws://<account-id>/<region>
    
    $ npm install
    
    $ npm run cdk:policystore
    
    

  2. After the deployment completes, locate the PolicyStoreId and CedarEntitiesTableName from Outputs:
    Outputs:
    AuthZENPolicyStoreStack.CedarEntitiesTableName = AuthZENPolicyStoreStack-EntitiesCedarEntitiesTableXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXXXXXXX
    AuthZENPolicyStoreStack.PolicyStoreId = 1234567890abcdef0
    Stack ARN:arn:aws:cloudformation:aa-example-1:123456789012:stack/AuthZENPolicyStoreStack/a1b2c3d4-5678-90ab-cdef-EXAMPLE11111
    

  3. Set the policy store ID and entities table name as environment variables:
    $ export POLICY_STORE_ID=1234567890abcdef0
    $ export ENTITIES_TABLE_NAME=AuthZENPolicyStoreStack-EntitiesCedarEntitiesTableXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXXXXXXX
    

Deploy AuthZEN interface for Verified Permissions

You then deploy a sample AuthZEN PDP interface that’s connected to the Verified Permissions policy store. The PDP includes the API Gateway REST API, the Lambda authorizer, and the Lambda function integration.

To deploy the PDP by using AWS CDK:

  1. Deploy the PDP stack by using the following commands:
    $ npm run cdk:pdp
    

    If you have a custom domain for the API Gateway endpoint, visit the CDK stack for AuthZEN HTTPS binding section for more information.

  2. After the deployment, locate the API endpoint and secret from Outputs. This is your AuthZEN authorization endpoint.
    Outputs:
    AuthZENPDPStack.ApiCredentialsSecretArn = arn:aws:secretsmanager:aa-example-1:123456789012:secret:ApiCredentials-XXX
    AuthZENPDPStack.RestApiEndpoint1234567A = https://abcdef0123.execute-api.aa-example-1.amazonaws.com/prod/
    Stack ARN:
    arn:aws:cloudformation:aa-example-1:123456789012:stack/AuthZENPDPStack/a1b2c3d4-5678-90ab-cdef-EXAMPLE22222
    

Test the deployment

The OpenID AuthZEN working group has defined a set of interoperability scenarios based on a sample Todo application as the PEP. You can view the payload specification for each API authorization request and test it with AuthZEN’s API Gateway test runner.

To test the deployment: 

  1. Clone AuthZEN API Gateway test runner and navigate to the test-harness directory.
  2. Set the secret ARN in the environment variable.
    $ export SECRET_ARN=arn:aws:secretsmanager:aa-example-1:123456789012:secret:ApiCredentials-XXX
    

  3. Set the predefined AuthZEN test runner’s environment variable for the Authorization header value.
    $ export AUTHZEN_PDP_API_KEY=$(aws secretsmanager get-secret-value --secret-id $SECRET_ARN --query 'SecretString' --output text | jq -r '.authSecret')
    

  4. Install the dependencies and perform the test by running the following command:
    $ yarn
    
    $ yarn build
    
    $ yarn test https://abcdef0123.execute-api.aa-example-1.amazonaws.com/prod/ console
    

  5. The following interoperability results display in the console:
    $ yarn test https://abcdef0123.execute-api.aa-example-1.amazonaws.com/prod/ console
    yarn run v1.22.22
    $ node build/runner.js https://abcdef0123.execute-api.aa-example-1.amazonaws.com/prod/ console
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDA2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"GET"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/users/{userId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDA2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"GET"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDA2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"POST"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDA2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"PUT"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos/{todoId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDA2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"DELETE"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos/{todoId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDE2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"GET"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/users/{userId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDE2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"GET"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDE2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"POST"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDE2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"PUT"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos/{todoId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDE2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"DELETE"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos/{todoId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDI2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"GET"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/users/{userId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDI2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"GET"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDI2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"POST"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDI2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"PUT"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos/{todoId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDI2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"DELETE"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos/{todoId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDM2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"GET"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/users/{userId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDM2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"GET"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDM2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"POST"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDM2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"PUT"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos/{todoId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDM2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"DELETE"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos/{todoId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDQ2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"GET"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/users/{userId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDQ2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"GET"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDQ2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"POST"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDQ2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"PUT"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos/{todoId}"}}
    PASS REQ: {"subject":{"type":"identity","id":"CiRmZDQ2MTRkMy1jMzlhLTQ3ODEtYjdiZC04Yjk2ZjVhNTEwMGQSBWxvY2Fs"},"action":{"name":"DELETE"},"resource":{"type":"route","id":"/todos/{todoId}"}}
    

The PASS REQ results indicate this deployment has met AuthZEN interoperability test scenarios requirements. You can also view the latest results at OpenID AuthZEN Interop results summary site.

It’s your turn to build

In this post, we introduced an open-source AuthZEN interface for Amazon Verified Permissions that’s based on the OpenID Foundation’s AuthZEN working group specifications. This implementation provides developers with a transparent way to adopt industry-standard authorization practices while maintaining the security and scalability benefits of the managed authorization service provided by AWS.

If you’re interested in learning more about Cedar and Verified Permissions, see the following references:

If you’re interested in this new specification, join the AuthZEN Working Group and provide your feedback through the associated GitHub repository.

If you have feedback about this post, submit comments in the Comments section below.

Edward Sun

Edward Sun

Edward is a Security Specialist Solutions Architect focused on identity and access management. He loves helping customers throughout their cloud transformation journey with architecture design, security best practices, migration, and cost optimizations. Outside of work, Edward enjoys hiking, golfing, and cheering for his alma mater, the Georgia Bulldogs.

Kevin Hakanson

Kevin Hakanson

Kevin is a Senior Solutions Architect for AWS Worldwide Public Sector, based in Minnesota. He works with EdTech customers to ideate, design, validate, and launch products using cloud-focused technologies and modern development practices. When not staring at a computer screen, he’s probably staring at another screen, either watching TV or playing video games with his family.

Enhanced Network Security Control: Flow Management with AWS Network Firewall

Post Syndicated from Hardik Shah original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/security/enhanced-network-security-control-flow-management-with-aws-network-firewall/

AWS Network Firewall is a managed, stateful network firewall and intrusion detection and prevention service. It allows you to implement security rules for fine-grained control of your VPC network traffic. In this blog post, we discuss flow capture and flow flush, new features of AWS Network Firewall that enhance network visibility and security policy enforcement. Flow capture provides comprehensive visibility into active network flows for monitoring and troubleshooting, while flow flush enables selective termination of specific flows or all flows. These capabilities are valuable for routine network monitoring, troubleshooting, and policy updates, as well as during security incidents, where quick isolation of potentially compromised systems is crucial.

Once the traffic flow is allowed by the firewall, that decision remains in effect for the lifetime of the flow. When you modify firewall rules—for example, changing from a broader to a more targeted firewall policy—you may want to review and re-apply the new policy on the existing flows to maintain compliance with your updated security requirements. This is particularly valuable in dynamic cloud environments where security policies are regularly updated, or during security incidents requiring rapid response. These new features provide additional visibility and control of this fundamental aspect of firewall behavior by providing a native capability to identify active flows and selectively flush their connection details from firewall’s inspection engine. As a result, you can maintain consistent policy enforcement across your network during planned security updates or while flushing suspicious network traffic flows during security events.

These features are accessible via AWS Management Console and AWS Network Firewall API.

Before we dive into how to use these new features, let’s go over some of the terms that are introduced.

Understanding the terminologies:

  1. Active flow: A flow in AWS Network Firewall is a tracked network connection identified by a unique 5-tuple (source IP, destination IP, source port, destination port, and protocol). In the context of flow capture and flush features, an active flow refers to a network flow that is not in a CLOSED state. For example, for TCP, this includes a session in the NEW or ESTABLISHED state.
  2. Flow filter: A set of parameters that defines which active network flows to match based on one or more criteria (such as source IP address, destination IP address, source port, destination port, or protocol). A single flow filter can match multiple network flows that meet the defined criteria.
  3. Flow capture: A firewall operation that generates a point-in-time snapshot of active flows based on the defined flow filter(s). You can use this feature to gain network traffic visibility, analyze security events, and validate flows before flush operation.
  4. Flow flush: A firewall operation that flushes selected active flows from the firewall flow table at a specific point in time based on your defined flow filter(s). Subsequent packets after the flush are treated as midstream flows and are re-evaluated against the stream exception policy.

Overview: Flow capture and flow flush operations workflow

AWS Network Firewall uses the open-source intrusion detection and prevention system (IDS/IPS) Suricata for stateful inspection. When inspecting your VPC traffic, the firewall maintains detailed connection state information in a flow table. This means that rather than examining individual packets in isolation, the firewall understands the full context of each network connection. You might need to flush flows in two common scenarios: either to clear all active flows (for example, during troubleshooting or maintenance) or to selectively flush specific flows (for example, when you update your firewall rules and want to flush long-running flows) based on flow filter criteria like IP address, port, or protocol. You can either capture flows first to review them before flushing, or directly flush flows using specified filters. You can monitor and verify the status and details of your capture and flush operations through the firewall operation history.

Let’s see flow capture and flush features in action:

To access these features via console:

  1. Sign in to the AWS management console and open Amazon VPC console.
  2. In the navigation pane, under Network Firewall, select Firewalls.
  3. Under Firewalls, select the name of the Firewall you want to capture/flush flows from.
  4. In the Firewall operations section, you can see the Configure flow capture and Configure flow flush options.
    Figure 1: Firewall operations

    Figure 1: Firewall operations

Flow capture

In this section, you will learn how to capture active flows based on full or partial 5-tuple filters. In this setup, traffic between subnets 10.0.1.0/24 and 10.0.2.0/24, both within the same VPC, is configured to go through AWS Network Firewall for inspection. The goal here is to identify active flows from source subnet 10.0.1.0/24 to destination subnet 10.0.2.0/24 on TCP port 80, and then flush these identified flows.

Figure 2: Network setup

Figure 2: Network setup

To start flow capture via the console:

  1. Select Configure flow capture to identify active flows as shown in figure 1. This opens a new window, as shown in figure 3.
  2. Select Availability Zone.
  3. Enter Source or Destination address (at least one field is required).
  4. Optionally, enter Minimum age of flow, Source Port, Destination Port, and Protocol (ICMP, TCP, UDP, IPv6-ICMP, or SCTP).
  5. Click Add filter. You can add up to 20 filters using full or partial 5-tuple combinations.
  6. Choose Start capture as shown in figure 3.

In figure 3, only the first filter is needed to capture traffic from subnet 10.0.1.0/24 to 10.0.2.0/24 on TCP port 80. Additional filters are shown to demonstrate other filter possibilities. Using more specific filters results in faster operation times.

Figure 3: Start capture operation

Figure 3: Start capture operation

Once capture is complete, the flow operation displays the flows captured by the filter, as shown in figure 4.

Figure 4: Flow capture operation result

Figure 4: Flow capture operation result

Flow flush

In this section, you will learn how to flush flows based on a full or partial 5-tuple. When you need to identify active flows before flushing them, first use the capture operation described in the previous section. Alternatively, you can initiate a new flow flush operation by defining new filters to flush specific active flows.

To start flow flush via the console:

Option 1: Capture then flush

  1. Select Configure flow flush from figure 4 to flush the flows matching your previously defined Filters in the Configure flow capture operation.
  2. Select Start flush in figure 5 to start the flush operation.
    Figure 5: Start flush from previous flow capture filter

    Figure 5: Start flush from previous flow capture filter

Option 2: Direct flush

  1. Select Configure flow flush in Firewall operations as shown in figure 1.
  2. Configure the Filter properties as shown in figure 3.
  3. Initiate the Start flush operation.

After the flow flush operation is complete using either option, you can see the flushed flows as shown in figure 6.

Figure 6: Flow flush operation result

Figure 6: Flow flush operation result

For additional verification of flow flushing, you can perform a flow capture operation followed by a flow flush. When flows are flushed, clients typically attempt to reconnect. These retry attempts are recorded in the firewall’s flow table and appear in flow capture results. You can use the Minimum age parameter as a filter to help prevent retry flows from cluttering your flow capture data.

Additionally, if you have AWS Network Firewall flow logs configured for your firewall’s stateful engine, the flow logs display entries for flushed flows. These entries show the reason’ field as flushed and include the last state of the flow before it was flushed.

Figure 7: AWS Network Firewall Flow logs when flow is flushed

Figure 7: AWS Network Firewall Flow logs when flow is flushed

Firewall operation history

The Firewall operation history displays the capture and flush operations from the past 12 hours with unique operation IDs for the selected Availability Zone (AZ). Operations older than 12 hours are automatically purged. By clicking on a specific Flow operation ID, you can see the details of each capture or flush flow operation.

Figure 8: Firewall operation history

Figure 8: Firewall operation history

Things to know:

  • You can perform one operation (either flow capture or flow flush) at a time per AZ per firewall. If your firewall endpoints are deployed in multiple AZs, you can run a flow capture or flow flush operation simultaneously in multiple AZs.
  • Use the Minimum age parameter in Filter properties to identify or flush long-running flows. For example, setting Minimum age to 300 seconds includes only flows that are active for 5+ minutes.
  • The firewall policy’s stream exception policy is applied to packets that arrive at the firewall after their corresponding flow state is flushed. For most applications, we recommend the reject stream exception policy.
  • Due to the distributed nature of the firewall infrastructure, the actual execution of flow capture and flush operations may vary slightly across different firewall hosts. Both capture and flush operations roll across the firewall infrastructure rather than executing as point-in-time operations.
  • These features support both IPv4 and IPv6 flows.
  • AWS CloudTrail records flow capture and flush operations as Management events for auditing.

Conclusion

In this post, you learned how the flow capture and flush features allow you to identify and flush existing flows and validate your security configurations, including stream exception policy implementations, on demand. By using these enhanced features, organizations can actively monitor their network traffic, quickly respond to security events, and verify that their updated security policies are consistently enforced across active connections. There is no additional cost to use these features, and they are enabled by default for existing and new customers.

To learn more about AWS Network Firewall, see the AWS Network Firewall product page and the service documentation. To see which Regions AWS Network Firewall is available in, visit the AWS Region Table.

If you have feedback about this post, submit comments in the comments section below. If you have questions about this post, contact AWS Support.

Hardik Shah

Hardik Shah

Hardik is a Sr. Technical Account Manager at AWS. He brings extensive experience from finance, travel, and retail industries to support customers on their cloud journey. With a deep passion for technology and networking, he enjoys solving complex technical challenges and helping customers optimize their AWS infrastructure. Outside of work, Hardik likes to spend time with his family, traveling, and exploring cultures and cuisines.

Amish Shah

Amish is a seasoned product leader with over 15 years’ experience developing innovative and scalable solutions for networking, security, and cloud use cases. He currently leads the AWS Network Firewall service, where he helps develop security solutions that protect AWS workloads. Outside of work, Amish enjoys playing cricket and soccer, loves to travel, and has recently started collecting niche fragrances.

Pranav Bhardwaj

Pranav Bhardwaj

Pranav is a seasoned Software Development Engineer on the AWS Network Firewall team, with over a decade of experience in building robust cloud security products and services. He works closely with customers to solve complex challenges, delivering customer value and driving innovation in scalable cloud security services.

Cody Williams

Cody Williams

Cody is a Software Engineer with 10 years of experience in software engineering, with the past 4 years contributing to building and maintaining AWS Network Firewall. He holds a Bachelor’s degree from the University of Tennessee, Knoxville, and enjoys spending time with his wife and their Greyhound.

Automating AWS Private CA audit reports and certificate expiration alerts

Post Syndicated from Santosh Vallurupalli original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/security/automating-aws-private-ca-audit-reports-and-certificate-expiration-alerts/

Today’s organizations rely heavily on secure and reliable communication channels and digital certificates play a crucial role in securing internal and external-facing infrastructure by establishing trust and enabling encrypted communication. While public certificates are commonly used to secure internet applications, many organizations prefer private certificates for internal resources to maintain confidentiality and enable custom configurations that public certificates don’t support. AWS Private Certificate Authority (AWS Private CA) offers a comprehensive solution to create and manage private certificate hierarchies within an organization’s public key infrastructure (PKI). AWS handles the heavy lifting of certificate authority (CA) management, allowing organizations to issue certificates for various use cases, including creating encrypted communication channels, authenticating clients, and cryptographically signing code. These certificates remain trusted within the organization, helping to ensure internal security without exposing them to the public internet.

AWS Certificate Manager (ACM) and AWS Private CA provide robust tools to issue and manage certificates seamlessly within AWS. However, as workloads evolve—spanning cloud native microservices, containerized environments, and hybrid edge deployments—the default certificate configurations might not meet every need. For instance, private TLS certificates requested using ACM come with a fixed 13-month validity period, which ACM tracks and renews automatically. But what if your organization requires certificates with custom validity periods such as short-lived certificates for ephemeral containers or certificates with extended durations for your on-premises systems? This is a common scenario for enterprises using modern architectures. You can gain significant advantages by creating and updating your certificates through AWS Command Line Interface (AWS CLI) or AWS SDKs. These powerful tools offer enhanced flexibility and integrate seamlessly with existing workflows.

Taking this efficiency even further, you can optimize your certificate management by bypassing the AWS Management Console, using the AWS CLI or SDK to generate certificates programmatically through their custom PKI pipelines.

You can use this automation-friendly approach to maintain full control over your certificate lifecycle, though it’s worth noting that ACM doesn’t inherently track the expiration of certificates that are issued using the acm-pca:IssueCertificate API, and aren’t requested using ACM. Lack of oversight on certificate expiration can lead to operational disruptions and compromise the accessibility of your applications. The AWS Private CA offers a powerful option to address this gap: the Generate audit report option. This option produces a detailed report of the certificates issued by your certificate hierarchy—including their expiration dates—regardless of how they were generated. However, with organizations managing vast numbers of certificates across multiple certificate hierarchies, manual report generation and review becomes impractical and unsustainable.

In this blog post, we guide you through a custom automation workflow that harnesses AWS Private CA audit reports to monitor certificate expirations proactively. The solution uses Amazon EventBridge, AWS Lambda, Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3), Amazon Simple Notification Service (Amazon SNS), and AWS Security Hub to generate daily reports, review them for expiring certificates, notify stakeholders, and generate log findings for centralized visibility. We’ve also included an AWS CloudFormation template to deploy this solution in your AWS environments, complete with step-by-step instructions. This approach can help ensure that you stay ahead of certificate expirations.

The challenge: Certificate management beyond the defaults

To understand why this solution matters, let’s explore the evolving needs of certificate management.

Certificates requested using ACM that are issued by your private CA through the console default to a 13-month validity period; a reasonable middle ground for many workloads. ACM tracks these certificates, monitors their expiration, and even automates renewals. This hands-off approach works well for standard cloud applications, but modern IT environments are rarely standard because of the diverse requirements of real-world use cases.

Consider these real-world examples:

  • Short-lived certificates: in containerized environments running on EKS or Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS) certificates with validity periods of a few hours or days are increasingly common. Service meshes like Istio or Linkerd rely on short-lived certificates to secure pod-to-pod communication, reducing the threat surface if a key is compromised. A 13-month certificate might not be optimal for this use case.
  • Long-lived certificates: On the other hand, some workloads—often found in traditional or resource-constrained environments—benefit from certificates with extended validity periods. For instance, systems deployed in locations with unreliable or restricted network access might require longer-lived certificates to minimize the challenges of frequent renewals, which could disrupt operations or require manual intervention. Likewise, infrastructures running critical applications with minimal automation might lean towards multi-year certificates to reduce the administrative burden and maintain consistent security over time. In such cases, long-lived certificates offer a dependable solution, balancing security needs with operational simplicity and minimizing the frequency of maintenance tasks.

To address these needs, many organizations turn to their own continuous integration and delivery (CI/CD) pipelines and custom automation using AWS Private CA and ACM. Using AWS CLI or SDKs, you can use AWS Private CA to issue certificates that have custom validity periods tailored to their workload requirements.

Extending certificate monitoring beyond ACM integrated services

Even if certificates aren’t requested using ACM, you can optionally re-import the certificates into ACM. After the certificates have been imported, ACM begins tracking and monitoring them. However, you have the flexibility to decide which certificates to import. Certificates that aren’t imported into ACM will not be tracked by the service. These certificates won’t appear in the ACM console, their expiration events won’t trigger Amazon CloudWatch Logs and managed renewals of these certificates aren’t supported by ACM.

Without a centralized view, you must manually monitor expiration dates, a task that quickly becomes unmanageable as certificate volume grows. An expired certificate can lead to downtime (for example, a load balancer rejecting traffic). This is where the ability to generate an audit report from AWS Private CA can help you. It provides a comprehensive list of all the certificates issued by your CA, including serial numbers, issuance dates, and expiration dates. However, generating this report manually using the console and reviewing it daily isn’t scalable.

In the following section, we show you how to set up a more scalable, automated solution that will notify you when certificates need to be renewed.

Prerequisites

For this walkthrough, you need to have the following:

  • An AWS account
  • A private CA from AWS Private CA
  • An externally created certificate imported into ACM

Solution overview

This audit generation solution provides an automated, scalable, and integrated approach to generating and analyzing audit reports for certificates issued by AWS Private CA. It uses AWS services to monitor certificate statuses, detect impending expirations, and notify administrators while integrating findings into Security Hub for centralized security monitoring. The solution helps ensure timely awareness of expiring certificates; enhancing compliance and operational security.

The following figure shows the solution architecture. The process begins with an EventBridge rule (PCAReportRule) that triggers the audit report generation on a user-defined schedule (for example: daily). This rule invokes the first of the two Lambda functions: PCAauditReportLambdaGenerator. This function interacts with the AWS boto3 SDK to generate an audit report, capturing details of issued certificates. The report is formatted as a CSV file (with optional JSON support configurable in the Lambda function) and stored in a designated S3 bucket. To simulate expiration alerts for demonstration purposes, certificates can be issued with a validity period of less than 30 days, as opposed to the default 13-month validity of AWS Private CA certificates.

Figure 1: Solution architecture

Figure 1: Solution architecture

After the audit report is uploaded to the S3 bucket, an S3:PutObject event notification triggers the second Lambda function, PCAAuditReportLambdaProcessor. This function downloads the most recent report, parses the data in the CSV file, and analyzes the details to identify certificates that are expiring within the 30-day threshold. Upon identifying expiring certificates, the function sends a consolidated notification using an Amazon SNS topic PCASNSTopic, which supports subscriptions such as an email or an optional Amazon Simple Queue Service (Amazon SQS) queue for further processing. Simultaneously, the function integrates findings into Security Hub, providing a centralized view of expiring certificates for compliance tracking and security monitoring.

The architecture is deployed using a CloudFormation template, automating the setup of the core components—EventBridge, Lambda functions, an S3 bucket, an SNS topic, and Security Hub integration—into a cohesive system. Security Hub serves as a cloud security posture management service that provides organizations with a consolidated view of their security alerts and compliance status across your AWS accounts. It functions as a central dashboard where security data from various sources and AWS services is aggregated, enabling automatic assessment of resources against established security standards while helping teams prioritize security concerns throughout their environment. This design helps ensure scalability, flexibility, and minimal manual intervention, enabling users to modify the Lambda functions to support additional report formats (such as JSON) or adjust notification thresholds as required. It’s also worth noting that you can generate a report every 30 minutes.

Deploy the solution

With the prerequisites in place and an understanding of the architecture, you’re ready to deploy and test the automation workflow and run an audit report on-demand.

Deploy the CloudFormation template

  1. To get started, clone the following GitHub repo.
    ~ $ curl -O https://aws-security-blog-content.s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/public/sample/2526-monitor-private-ca-issued-certificates-aws-private-certificate-authority-eventbridge/ACM-PCA-Monitoring-cfn.yml  
    
    ~ $ ls 
    ACM-PCA-Monitoring-cfn.yml
    

    The ACM-PCA-Monitoring-cfn.yml CloudFormation template includes the following parameters, which allow you to customize the deployment:

    • CertificateAuthorityArn: The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) (<ARN_of_your_PrivateCA>) of your pre-existing private CA for which the audit report is generated.
    • S3BucketName: A new S3 bucket (<Name_of_s3_bucket>) where the audit report will be stored.
    • EventBridgeRuleName: The name of the EventBridge rule (<Name_of_EventBridgeRule>) to trigger the Lambda function (default value: PCAReportRule).
    • CronJobExpression: A cron expression (<Frequency_of_running_evaluation>) to define the schedule for report generation (default value: cron(0 21 * * ? *)).
    • SNSName: The name of a new Amazon SNS topic (<Name_of_SNS_Topic>) for expiration alerts (default value: PCASNSTopic).
    • SQSName: The name of a new Amazon SQS queue (<Name_of_SQS>) for expiration alerts (default value PCASQS).
    • EmailAddress: The email address for receiving notifications (<Email_to_Receive_alerts>).
    • CertificateExpirationThreshold: The threshold value in days (<Expiration_threshold_in_days>) to monitor for your certificate’s expiration (default value: 30).
  2. Run the following command to create the CloudFormation stack. Stack creation will take 2–3 minutes to complete.
    aws cloudformation create-stack \
    --stack-name PCAMonitoringWorkflow \
    --template-body file://ACM-PCA-Monitoring-cfn.yml \
    --capabilities CAPABILITY_NAMED_IAM \
    --parameters '[
        {"ParameterKey": "CertificateAuthorityArn", "ParameterValue": "<ARN_of_your_PrivateCA>"},
        {"ParameterKey": "S3BucketName", "ParameterValue": "<Name_of_s3_bucket>"},
        {"ParameterKey": "EventBridgeRuleName", "ParameterValue": "<Name_of_EventBridgeRule>"},
        {"ParameterKey": "CronJobExpression", "ParameterValue": "<Frequency_of_running_evaluation>"},
        {"ParameterKey": "SNSName", "ParameterValue": "<Name_of_SNS_Topic>"},
        {"ParameterKey": "SQSName", "ParameterValue": "<Name_of_SQS>"},
        {"ParameterKey": "EmailAddress", "ParameterValue": "<Email_to_Receive_alerts>"},
        {"ParameterKey": "CertificateExpirationThreshold", "ParameterValue": "<Expiration_threshold_in_days>"}
    ]'
    
    

  3. When stack creation is complete, you’ll get an email asking you to confirm your subscription to the specified SNS topic from the previous step.
    Figure 2: Sample notification email sent by Amazon SNS

    Figure 2: Sample notification email sent by Amazon SNS

Test the automation workflow

  1. Test the automation workflow by creating a private certificate that will trigger your expiration alert system. To do this, you’ll generate a private certificate using your private CA with an intentionally short expiration period. The certificate should expire before the threshold you set in the CloudFormation template (the default is 30 days). For example, if you kept the default 30-day threshold, the following code will generate a certificate that expires in 20 days, which should trigger the notification system:
    #Generate a Private Key
    ~ $ % openssl genrsa -out private-key.pem 2048
    
    #List the private key
    ~ $ % ls 
    private-key.pem
    
    #Generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
    ~ $ % openssl req -new -key private-key.pem -out csr.pem -subj "/C=US/ST=Ohio/L=Columbus/O=MyOrg/OU=IT/CN=mydomain.com"
    
    
    #Issue a Certificate
    ~ $ % aws acm-pca issue-certificate --certificate-authority-arn <specify_arn_of_PrivateCA> --csr "$(cat csr.pem | base64 | tr -d '\n')" --signing-algorithm "SHA256WITHRSA" --validity Value=20,Type="DAYS"
    
    {
     "CertificateArn": "arn:aws:acm-pca:us-east-2:XXXXXX:certificate-authority/7574de75-e5fd-47d0-a4e2-3afc3c0ba4b3/certificate/87980cc7a1cca819dd9082e6cd360c65"
    }
    
    
    #Retrieve the Issued Certificate
    ~ $ % aws acm-pca get-certificate --certificate-authority-arn <specify_arn_of_PrivateCA> --certificate-arn <specify_arn_of_Certificate_generated_above> --output text > certificate.pem
    

Note: You’ll receive alerts for all certificates that are approaching expiration, even for certificates that are requested using ACM, which support managed renewal. You can compare the ARN of the expiring certificate to your list of requested certificates in the ACM console, or to the results of the acm:ListCertificates API.

With the audit report infrastructure deployed and a test certificate created within your expiration threshold, the next step is to trigger the automation workflow to generate and process the audit report.

Run an audit report on-demand

To test the EventBridge rule PCAReportRule, you’ll temporarily modify it to run every 30 minutes. When you’re done testing, you can revert it back to the original scheduled that you specified in the CloudFormation template parameters.

  1. In the Amazon EventBridge console, choose Rules in the navigation pane. Select PCAReportRule and then choose Edit rule.
  2. Select Define schedule.
    1. Under Schedule pattern, select A schedule that runs at a regular rate…
    2. Under Rate expression, for Value enter 30, and for Unit, select Minutes.
    3. Choose Next.
    Figure 3: Edit the schedule of PCAReportRule for the test

    Figure 3: Edit the schedule of PCAReportRule for the test

  3. For an immediate test, you can also trigger this workflow from the Lambda console.
    1. In the Lambda console, choose Functions in the navigation pane, and then select the PCAauditReportLambdaGenerator Lambda function.
    2. Choose the Test tab, leave the default values for the Event JSON.
    3. Choose Test at the top of the window.
    Figure 4: Use the console to trigger a test

    Figure 4: Use the console to trigger a test

  4. This Lambda function generates an AWS Private CA audit report and saves it to the specified S3 bucket at the audit-report prefix. To verify this, navigate to the Amazon S3 console and choose Buckets from the navigation pane.
  5. Select the bucket that you created when you ran the CloudFormation template and verify the reports in the audit-report folder.
    Figure 5: The audit report is saved to the specified S3 bucket

    Figure 5: The audit report is saved to the specified S3 bucket

  6. When an audit report is uploaded to the S3 bucket, it automatically triggers the PCAAuditReportLambdaProcessor Lambda function through S3 event notifications. The function analyzes the audit report to identify any certificates approaching expiration. If certificates are found that will expire within the specified threshold (30 days by default), the function automatically creates detailed findings in Security Hub for tracking and monitoring purposes. These findings include important details such as the certificate ARN, expiration date, and severity level.
  7. Because you created a test certificate that expires in 20 days (which is within the test threshold), the automation workflow will detect this and generate corresponding findings in Security Hub. To see the results go to the Security Hub console and choose Findings in the navigation pane.
    Figure 6: View the audit report findings in Security Hub

    Figure 6: View the audit report findings in Security Hub

  8. After creating Security Hub findings, the Lambda function sends detailed certificate expiration alerts through Amazon SNS. You’ll receive an email notification at the address you provided in the CloudFormation parameters. The email will contain important information about the certificates approaching expiration, including their ARNs and exact expiration dates. Here’s an example of the email notification format
    Figure 7: Sample notification email sent by Amazon SNS

    Figure 7: Sample notification email sent by Amazon SNS

Conclusion

Certificate management is crucial for maintaining security across modern workloads, and AWS Private CA plays a vital role in issuing certificates with custom validity periods. The solution in this post delivers a robust, automated approach to certificate lifecycle management by seamlessly integrating several AWS services.

The solution combines Amazon EventBridge for scheduled execution of audit reports, AWS Lambda for automated processing and analysis, Amazon S3 for secure storage of audit reports, Amazon SNS for immediate notification delivery, and AWS Security Hub for centralized monitoring and tracking. This powerful integration creates a comprehensive automation workflow that actively monitors certificate expirations and provides timely alerts across your cloud, hybrid, and edge deployments.

By implementing this CloudFormation template, you can:

  • Automate the generation and processing of AWS Private CA audit reports at scheduled intervals
  • Receive immediate notifications when certificates approach their expiration threshold
  • Maintain centralized visibility through detailed Security Hub findings
  • Track certificate lifecycles across your entire infrastructure
  • Help ensure compliance with organizational security policies
  • Minimize the risk of service disruptions due to expired certificates

The solution transforms traditional certificate management from a manual, error-prone process into a streamlined, automated workflow. It provides security teams with the tools they need to proactively manage certificate lifecycles, maintain compliance requirements, and respond quickly to potential certificate-related issues. The automated notifications and centralized monitoring through Security Hub help ensure that no certificate expiration goes unnoticed, allowing teams to take timely action before service disruptions occur.

The result is a scalable, reliable system that simplifies certificate management and strengthens your organization’s overall security posture through consistent monitoring and proactive management of certificate lifecycles.

If you have feedback about this post, submit comments in the Comments section below.

Santosh Vallurupalli

Santosh Vallurupalli

Santosh is a Sr. Solutions Architect at AWS. Santosh specializes in networking, containers, and migrations and enjoys helping customers in their journey of cloud adoption and building Cloud Native solutions for challenging issues. When not working, he likes traveling, watching Formula1 and watching “The Office” in repeat mode.

Manthan Raval

Manthan Raval

Manthan is a Principal Solutions Architect at AWS specializing in the gaming industry, where he helps customers architect secure, high-performance, scalable cloud solutions. Manthan works closely with gaming companies to transform their operations through cloud innovation. He has guided numerous organizations in their cloud transformation journeys, developing robust architectures that drive business value. He shares his knowledge through public speaking, technical workshops, and customer education sessions across the globe.

Optimize multimodal search using the TwelveLabs Embed API and Amazon OpenSearch Service

Post Syndicated from James Le original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/big-data/optimize-multimodal-search-using-the-twelvelabs-embed-api-and-amazon-opensearch-service/

This blog is co-authored by James Le, Head of Developer Experience – TwelveLabs

The exponential growth of video content has created both opportunities and challenges. Content creators, marketers, and researchers are now faced with the daunting task of efficiently searching, analyzing, and extracting valuable insights from vast video libraries. Traditional search methods such as keyword-based text search often fall short when dealing with video content to analyze the visual content, spoken words, or contextual elements within the video itself, leaving organizations struggling to effectively search through and unlock the full potential of their multimedia assets.

With the integration of TwelveLabs’ Embed API and Amazon OpenSearch Service, we can interact with and derive value from video content. By using TwelveLabs‘ advanced AI-powered video understanding technology and OpenSearch Service’s search and analytics capabilities, we can now perform advanced video discovery and gain deeper insights.

In this blog post, we show you the process of integrating TwelveLabs Embed API with OpenSearch Service to create a multimodal search solution. You’ll learn how to generate rich, contextual embeddings from video content and use OpenSearch Service’s vector database capabilities to enable search functionalities. By the end of this post, you’ll be equipped with the knowledge to implement a system that can transform the way your organization handles and extracts value from video content.

TwelveLabs’ multimodal embeddings process visual, audio, and text signals together to create unified representations, capturing the direct relationships between these modalities. This unified approach delivers precise, context-aware video search that matches human understanding of video content. Whether you’re a developer looking to enhance your applications with advanced video search capabilities, or a business leader seeking to optimize your content management strategies, this post will provide you with the tools and steps to implement multimodal search for your organizational data.

About TwelveLabs

TwelveLabs is an Advanced AWS Partner and AWS Marketplace Seller that offers video understanding solutions. Embed API is designed to revolutionize how you interact with and extract value from video content.

At its core, the Embed API transforms raw video content into meaningful, searchable data by using state-of-the-art machine learning models. These models extract and represent complex video information in the form of dense vector embeddings, each a standard 1024-dimensional vector that captures the essence of the video content across multiple modalities (image, text, and audio).

Key features of TwelveLabs Embed API

Below are the key features of TwelveLabs Embed API:

  • Multimodal understanding: The API generates embeddings that encapsulate various aspects of the video, including visual expressions, body language, spoken words, and overall context.
  • Temporal coherence: Unlike static image-based models, TwelveLabs’ embeddings capture the interrelations between different modalities over time, providing a more accurate representation of video content.
  • Flexibility: The API supports native processing of all modalities present in videos, eliminating the need for separate text-only or image-only models.
  • High performance: By using a video-native approach, the Embed API provides more accurate and temporally coherent interpretation of video content compared to traditional CLIP-like models.

Benefits and use cases

The Embed API offers numerous advantages for developers and businesses working with video content:

  • Enhanced Search Capabilities: Enable powerful multimodal search across video libraries, allowing users to find relevant content based on visual, audio, or textual queries.
  • Content Recommendation: Improve content recommendation systems by understanding the deep contextual similarities between videos.
  • Scene Detection and Segmentation: Automatically detect and segment different scenes within videos for easier navigation and analysis.
  • Content Moderation: Efficiently identify and flag inappropriate content across large video datasets.

Use cases include:

  • Anomaly detection
  • Diversity sorting
  • Sentiment analysis
  • Recommendations

Architecture overview

The architecture for using TwelveLabs Embed API and OpenSearch Service for advanced video search consists of the following components:

  • TwelveLabs Embed API: This API generates 1024-dimensional vector embeddings from video content, capturing visual, audio, and textual elements.
  • OpenSearch Vector Database: Stores and indexes the video embeddings generated by TwelveLabs.
  • Secrets Manager to store secrets such as API access keys, and the Amazon OpenSearch Service username and password.
  • Integration of TwelveLabs SDK and the OpenSearch Service client to process videos, generate embeddings, and index them in OpenSearch Service.

The following diagram illustrates:

  1. A video file is stored in Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3). Embeddings of the video file are created using TwelveLabs Embed API.
  2. Embeddings generated from the TwelveLabs Embed API are now ingested to Amazon OpenSearch Service.
  3. Users can search the video embeddings using text, audio, or image. The user uses TwelveLabs Embed API to create the corresponding embeddings.
  4. The user searches video embeddings in Amazon OpenSearch Service and retrieves the corresponding vector.

The use case

For the demo, you will work on these videos: Robin bird forest Video by Federico Maderno from Pixabay and Island Video by Bellergy RC from Pixabay.

However, the use case can be expanded to various other segments. For example, the news organization struggles with:

  1. Needle-in-haystack searches through thousands of hours of archival footage
  2. Manual metadata tagging that misses nuanced visual and audio context
  3. Cross-modal queries such as querying a video collection using text or audio descriptions
  4. Rapid content retrieval for breaking news tie-ins

By integrating TwelveLabs Embed API with OpenSearch Service, you can:

  • Generate 1024-dimensional embeddings capturing each video’s visual concepts. The embeddings are also capable of extracting spoken narration, on-screen text, and audio cues.
  • Enable multimodal search capabilities allowing users to:
    • Find specific demonstrations using text-based queries.
    • Locate activities through image-based queries.
    • Identify segments using audio pattern matching.
  • Reduce search time from hours to seconds for complex queries.

Solution walkthrough

GitHub repository contains a notebook with detailed walkthrough instructions for implementing advanced video search capabilities by combining TwelveLabs’ Embed API with Amazon OpenSearch Service.

Prerequisites

Before you proceed further, verify that the following prerequisites are met:

  • Confirm that you have an AWS account. Sign in to the AWS account.
  • Create a TwelveLabs account because it will be required to get the API Key. TwelveLabs offer free tier pricing but you can upgrade if necessary to meet your requirement.
  • Have an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. If you don’t have an existing domain, you can create one using the steps outlined in our public documentation for Creating and Managing Amazon OpenSearch Service Domain. Make sure that the OpenSearch Service domain is accessible from your Python environment. You can also use Amazon OpenSearch Serverless for this use case and update the interactions to OpenSearch Serverless using AWS SDKs.

Step 1: Set up the TwelveLabs SDK

Start by setting up the TwelveLabs SDK in your Python environment:

  1. Obtain your API key from TwelveLabs Dashboard.
  2. Follow steps here to create a secret in AWS Secrets Manager. For example, name the secret as TL_API_Key.Note down the ARN or name of the secret (TL_API_Key) to retrieve. To retrieve a secret from another account, you must use an ARN.For an ARN, we recommend that you specify a complete ARN rather than a partial ARN. See Finding a secret from a partial ARN.Use this value for the SecretId in the code block below.
import boto3
import json
secrets_manager_client=boto3.client("secretsmanager")
API_secret=secrets_manager_client.get_secret_value(
SecretId="TL_API_KEY"
)
TL_API_KEY=json.loads(API_secret["SecretString"])["TL_API_Key"]

Step 2: Generate video embeddings

Use the Embed API to create multimodal embeddings that are contextual vector representations for your videos and texts. TwelveLabs video embeddings capture all the subtle cues and interactions between different modalities, including the visual expressions, body language, spoken words, and the overall context of the video, encapsulating the essence of all these modalities and their interrelations over time.

To create video embeddings, you must first upload your videos, and the platform must finish processing them. Uploading and processing videos require some time. Consequently, creating embeddings is an asynchronous process comprised of three steps:

  1. Upload and process a video: When you start uploading a video, the platform creates a video embedding task and returns its unique task identifier.
  2. Monitor the status of your video embedding task: Use the unique identifier of your task to check its status periodically until it’s completed.
  3. Retrieve the embeddings: After the video embedding task is completed, retrieve the video embeddings by providing the task identifier. Learn more in the docs.

Video processing implementation

This demo depends upon some video data. To use this, you will download two mp4 files and upload it to an Amazon S3 bucket.

  1. Click on the links containing the Robin bird forest Video by Federico Maderno from Pixabay and Island Video by Bellergy RC from Pixabay videos.
  2. Download the 21723-320725678_small.mp4 and 2946-164933125_small.mp4 files.
  3. Create an S3 bucket if you don’t have one already. Follow the steps in the Creating a bucket doc. Note down the name of the bucket and replace it the code block below (Eg., MYS3BUCKET).
  4. Upload the 21723-320725678_small.mp4 and 2946-164933125_small.mp4 video files to the S3 bucket created in the step above by following the steps in the Uploading objects doc. Note down the name of the objects and replace it the code block below (Eg., 21723-320725678_small.mp4 and 2946-164933125_small.mp4)
s3_client=boto3.client("s3")
bird_video_data=s3_client.download_file(Bucket='MYS3BUCKET',  Key='21723-320725678_small.mp4', Filename='robin-bird.mp4')
island_video_data=s3_client.download_file(Bucket='MYS3BUCKET',  Key='2946-164933125_small.mp4', Filename='island.mp4')

def print_segments(segments: List[SegmentEmbedding], max_elements: int = 1024):
    for segment in segments:
        print(
            f"  embedding_scope={segment.embedding_scope} start_offset_sec={segment.start_offset_sec} end_offset_sec={segment.end_offset_sec}"
        )
        print(f"  embeddings: {segment.embeddings_float[:max_elements]}")

# Initialize client with API key
twelvelabs_client = TwelveLabs(api_key=TL_API_KEY)

video_files=["robin-bird.mp4", "island.mp4"]
tasks=[]

Embedding generation process

With the SDK configured, generate embeddings for your video and monitor task completion with real-time updates. Here you use the Marengo 2.7 model to generate the embeddings:

for video in video_files:
    # Create embedding task
    task = twelvelabs_client.embed.task.create(
        model_name="Marengo-retrieval-2.7",
        video_file=video
    )
    print(
        f"Created task: id={task.id} engine_name={task.model_name} status={task.status}"
    )
    
    def on_task_update(task: EmbeddingsTask):
        print(f"  Status={task.status}")
    
    status = task.wait_for_done(
        sleep_interval=2,
        callback=on_task_update
    )
    print(f"Embedding done: {status}")
    
    # Retrieve and inspect results
    task = task.retrieve()
    if task.video_embedding is not None and task.video_embedding.segments is not None:
        print_segments(task.video_embedding.segments)
    tasks.append(task)

Key features demonstrated include:

  • Multimodal capture: 1024-dimensional vectors encoding visual, audio, and textual features
  • Model specificity: Using Marengo-retrieval-2.7 optimized for scientific content
  • Progress tracking: Real-time status updates during embedding generation

Expected output

Created task: id=67ca93a989d8a564e80dc3ba engine_name=Marengo-retrieval-2.7 status=processing
  Status=processing
  Status=processing
  Status=processing
  Status=processing
  Status=processing
  Status=processing
  Status=processing
  Status=processing
  Status=processing
  Status=ready
Embedding done: ready
  embedding_scope=clip start_offset_sec=0.0 end_offset_sec=6.0
  embeddings: [0.022429451, 0.00040668788, -0.01825908, -0.005862708, -0.03371106, 
-6.357456e-05, -0.015320076, -0.042556215, -0.02782445, -0.00019097517, 0.03258314, 
-0.0061399476, -0.00049206393, 0.035632476, 0.028209884, 0.02875258, -0.035486065, 
-0.11288028, -0.040782217, -0.0359422, 0.015908664, -0.021092793, 0.016303983, 
0.06351931,…………………

Step 3: Set up OpenSearch

To enable vector search capabilities, you first need to set up an OpenSearch client and test the connection. Follow these steps:

Install the required libraries

Install the necessary Python packages for working with OpenSearch:

!pip install opensearch-py
!pip install botocore
!pip install requests-aws4auth

Configure the OpenSearch client

Set up the OpenSearch client with your host details and authentication credentials:

from opensearchpy import OpenSearch, RequestsHttpConnection, helpers
from requests_aws4auth import AWS4Auth
from requests.auth import HTTPBasicAuth

# OpenSearch connection configuration
# host = 'your-host.aos.us-east-1.on.aws'
host = 'search-new-domain-mbgs7wth6r5w6hwmjofntiqcge.aos.us-east-1.on.aws'
port = 443  # Default HTTPS port

# Get OpenSearch username secret from Secrets Manager
opensearch_username=secrets_manager_client.get_secret_value(
    SecretId="AOS_username"
)
opensearch_username_string=json.loads(opensearch_username["SecretString"])["AOS_username"]

# Get OpenSearch password secret from Secrets Manager
opensearch_password = secrets_manager_client.get_secret_value(
    SecretId="AOS_password"
)
opensearch_password_string=json.loads(opensearch_password["SecretString"])["AOS_password"]

auth=(opensearch_username_string, opensearch_password_string)

# Create the client configuration
client_aos = OpenSearch(
    hosts=[{'host': host, 'port': port}],
    http_auth=auth,
    use_ssl=True,
    verify_certs=True,
    connection_class=RequestsHttpConnection
)

# Test the connection
try:
    # Get cluster information
    cluster_info = client_aos.info()
    print("Successfully connected to OpenSearch")
    print(f"Cluster info: {cluster_info}")
except Exception as e:
    print(f"Connection failed: {str(e)}")

Expected output

If the connection is successful, you should see a message like the following:

Successfully connected to OpenSearch
Cluster info: {'name': 'bb36e8d98ee7bd517891ecd714bfb9d7', ...}

This confirms that your OpenSearch client is properly configured and ready for use.

Step 4: Create an index in OpenSearch Service

Next, you create an index optimized for vector search to store the embeddings generated by the TwelveLabs Embed API.

Define the index configuration

The index is configured to support k-nearest neighbor (kNN) search with a 1024-dimensional vector field. You will these values for this demo but follow these best practices to find appropriate values for your application. Here’s the code:

# Define the enhanced index configuration
index_name = 'twelvelabs_index'
new_vector_index_definition = {
    "settings": {
        "index": {
            "knn": "true",
            "number_of_shards": 1,
            "number_of_replicas": 0
        }
    },
    "mappings": {
        "properties": {
            "embedding_field": {
                "type": "knn_vector",
                "dimension": 1024
            },
            "video_title": {
                "type": "text",
                "fields": {
                    "keyword": {
                        "type": "keyword"
                    }
                }
            },
            "segment_start": {
                "type": "date"
            },
            "segment_end": {
                "type": "date"
            },
            "segment_id": {
                "type": "text"
            }
        }
    }
}

Create the Index

Use the following code to create the index in OpenSearch Service:

# Create the index in OpenSearch
response = client_aos.indices.create(index=index_name, body=new_vector_index_definition, ignore=400)

# Retrieve and display index details to confirm creation
index_info = client_aos.indices.get(index=index_name)
print(index_info)

Expected output

After running this code, you should see details of the newly created index. For example:

{'twelvelabs_index': {'aliases': {}, 'mappings': {'properties': {'embedding_field': {'type': 'knn_vector', 'dimension': 1024}}}, 'settings': {...}}}

The following screenshot confirms that an index named twelvelabs_index has been successfully created with a knn_vector field of dimension 1024 and other specified settings. With these steps completed, you now have an operational OpenSearch Service domain configured for vector search. This index will serve as the repository for storing embeddings generated from video content, enabling advanced multimodal search capabilities.

Step 5: Ingest embeddings to the created index in OpenSearch Service

With the TwelveLabs Embed API successfully generating video embeddings and the OpenSearch Service index configured, the next step is to ingest these embeddings into the index. This process helps ensure that the embeddings are stored in OpenSearch Service and made searchable for multimodal queries.

Embedding ingestion process

The following code demonstrates how to process and index the embeddings into OpenSearch Service:

from opensearchpy.helpers import bulk

def generate_actions(tasks, video_files):
    count = 0
    for task in tasks:
        # Check if video embeddings are available
        if task.video_embedding is not None and task.video_embedding.segments is not None:
            embeddings_doc = task.video_embedding.segments
            
            # Generate actions for bulk indexing
            for doc_id, elt in enumerate(embeddings_doc):
                yield {
                    '_index': index_name,
                    '_id': doc_id,
                    '_source': {
                        'embedding_field': elt.embeddings_float,
                        'video_title': video_files[count],
                        'segment_start': elt.start_offset_sec,
                        'segment_end': elt.end_offset_sec,
                        'segment_id': doc_id
                    }
                }
        print(f"Prepared bulk indexing data for task {count}")
        count += 1

# Perform bulk indexing
try:
    success, failed = bulk(client_aos, generate_actions(tasks, video_files))
    print(f"Successfully indexed {success} documents")
    if failed:
        print(f"Failed to index {len(failed)} documents")
except Exception as e:
    print(f"Error during bulk indexing: {e}")

Explanation of the code

  1. Embedding extraction: The video_embedding.segments object contains a list of segment embeddings generated by the TwelveLabs Embed API. Each segment represents a specific portion of the video.
  2. Document creation: For each segment, a document is created with a key (embedding_field) that stores its 1024-dimensional vector, video_title with the title of the video, segment_start and segment_end indicating the timestamp of the video segment, and a segment_id.
  3. Indexing in OpenSearch: The index() method uploads each document to the twelvelabs_index created earlier. Each document is assigned a unique ID (doc_id) based on its position in the list.

Expected output

After the script runs successfully, you will see:

  • A printed list of embeddings being indexed.
  • A confirmation message:
Prepared bulk indexing data for task 0
Prepared bulk indexing data for task 1
Successfully indexed 6 documents

Result

At this stage, all video segment embeddings are now stored in OpenSearch and ready for advanced multimodal search operations, such as text-to-video or image-to-video queries. This sets up the foundation for performing efficient and scalable searches across your video content.

Step 6: Perform vector search in OpenSearch Service

After embeddings are generated, you use it as a query vector to perform a kNN search in the OpenSearch Service index. Below are the functions to perform vector search and format the search results:

# Function to perform vector search
def search_similar_segments(query_vector, k=5):
    query = {
        "size": k,
        "_source": ["video_title", "segment_start", "segment_end", "segment_id"],
        "query": {
            "knn": {
                "embedding_field": {
                    "vector": query_vector,
                    "k": k
                }
            }
        }
    }
    
    response = client_aos.search(
        index=index_name,
        body=query
    )

    results = []
    for hit in response['hits']['hits']:
        result = {
            'score': hit['_score'],
            'title': hit['_source']['video_title'],
            'start_time': hit['_source']['segment_start'],
            'end_time': hit['_source']['segment_end'],
            'segment_id': hit['_source']['segment_id']
        }
        results.append(result)

    return (results)

# Function to format search results
def print_search_results(results):
    print("\nSearch Results:")
    print("-" * 50)
    for i, result in enumerate(results, 1):
        print(f"\nResult {i}:")
        print(f"Video: {result['title']}")
        print(f"Time Range: {result['start_time']} - {result['end_time']}")
        print(f"Similarity Score: {result['score']:.4f}")

Key points:

  • The _source field contains the video title, segment start, segment end, and segment id corresponding to the video embeddings.
  • The embedding_field in the query corresponds to the field where video embeddings are stored.
  • The k parameter specifies how many top results to retrieve based on similarity.

Step 7:Performing text-to-video search

You can use text-to-video search to retrieve video segments that are most relevant to a given textual query. In this solution, you will do this by using TwelveLabs’ text embedding capabilities and OpenSearch’s vector search functionality. Here’s how you can implement this step:

Generate text embeddings

To perform a search, you first need to convert the text query into a vector representation using the TwelveLabs Embed API:

from typing import List
from twelvelabs.models.embed import SegmentEmbedding

def print_segments(segments: List[SegmentEmbedding], max_elements: int = 1024):
    for segment in segments:
        print(
            f"  embedding_scope={segment.embedding_scope} start_offset_sec={segment.start_offset_sec} end_offset_sec={segment.end_offset_sec}"
        )
        print(f"  embeddings: {segment.embeddings_float[:max_elements]}")

# Create text embeddings for the query
text_res = twelvelabs_client.embed.create(
    model_name="Marengo-retrieval-2.7",
    text="Bird eating food",  # Replace with your desired query
)

print("Created a text embedding")
print(f" Model: {text_res.model_name}")

# Extract and inspect the generated text embeddings
if text_res.text_embedding is not None and text_res.text_embedding.segments is not None:
    print_segments(text_res.text_embedding.segments)

vector_search = text_res.text_embedding.segments[0].embeddings_float
print("Generated Text Embedding Vector:", vector_search)

Key points:

  • The Marengo-retrieval-2.7 model is used to generate a dense vector embedding for the query.
  • The embedding captures the semantic meaning of the input text, enabling effective matching with video embeddings.

Perform vector search in OpenSearch Service

After the text embedding is generated, you use it as a query vector to perform a kNN search in the OpenSearch index:

# Define the vector search query
query_vector = vector_search
text_to_video_search = search_similar_segments(query_vector)
# print(text_video_search)
print_search_results(text_to_video_search)

Expected output

The following illustrates similar results retrieved from OpenSearch.

Search Results:
--------------------------------------------------

Result 1:
Video: robin-bird.mp4
Time Range: 18.0 - 21.087732
Similarity Score: 0.4409

Result 2:
Video: robin-bird.mp4
Time Range: 12.0 - 18.0
Similarity Score: 0.4300

Result 3:
Video: island.mp4
Time Range: 0.0 - 6.0
Similarity Score: 0.3624

Insights from results

  • Each result includes a similarity score indicating how closely it matches the query, a time range indicating the start and end offset in seconds, and the video title.
  • Observe that the top 2 results correspond to the robin bird video segments matching the Bird eating food query.

This process demonstrates how textual queries such as Bird eating food can effectively retrieve relevant video segments from an indexed library using TwelveLabs’ multimodal embeddings and OpenSearch’s powerful vector search capabilities.

Step 8: Perform audio-to-video search

You can use audio-to-video search to retrieve video segments that are most relevant to a given audio input. By using TwelveLabs’ audio embedding capabilities and OpenSearch’s vector search functionality, you can match audio features with video embeddings in the index. Here’s how to implement this step:

Generate audio embeddings

To perform the search, you first convert the audio input into a vector representation using the TwelveLabs Embed API:

# Create audio embeddings for the input audio file
audio_res = twelvelabs_client.embed.create(
    model_name="Marengo-retrieval-2.7",
    audio_file="audio-data.mp3",  # Replace with your desired audio file
)

# Print details of the generated embedding
print(f"Created audio embedding: model_name={audio_res.model_name}")
print(f" Model: {audio_res.model_name}")

# Extract and inspect the generated audio embeddings
if audio_res.audio_embedding is not None and audio_res.audio_embedding.segments is not None:
    print_segments(audio_res.audio_embedding.segments)

# Store the embedding vector for search
vector_search = audio_res.audio_embedding.segments[0].embeddings_float
print("Generated Audio Embedding Vector:", vector_search)

Key points:

  • The Marengo-retrieval-2.7 model is used to generate a dense vector embedding for the input audio.
  • The embedding captures the semantic features of the audio, such as rhythm, tone, and patterns, enabling effective matching with video embeddings

Perform vector search in OpenSearch Service

After the audio embedding is generated, you use it as a query vector to perform a k-nearest neighbor (kNN) search in OpenSearch:

# Perform vector search
query_vector = vector_search
audio_to_video_search = search_similar_segments(query_vector)
# print(text_video_search)
    
print_search_results(audio_to_video_search)

Expected output

The following shows video segments retrieved from OpenSearch Service based on their similarity to the input audio.

Search Results:
--------------------------------------------------

Result 1:
Video: island.mp4
Time Range: 6.0 - 12.0
Similarity Score: 0.2855

Result 2:
Video: robin-bird.mp4
Time Range: 18.0 - 21.087732
Similarity Score: 0.2841

Result 3:
Video: robin-bird.mp4
Time Range: 12.0 - 18.0
Similarity Score: 0.2837

Result 4:
Video: island.mp4
Time Range: 0.0 - 6.0
Similarity Score: 0.2835

Here notice that segments from both videos are returned with a low similarity score.

Step 9: Performing images-to-video search

You can use image-to-video search to retrieve video segments that are visually similar to a given image. By using TwelveLabs’ image embedding capabilities and OpenSearch Service’s vector search functionality, you can match visual features from an image with video embeddings in the index. Here’s how to implement this step:

Generate Image Embeddings

To perform the search, you first convert the input image into a vector representation using the TwelveLabs Embed API:

# Create image embeddings for the input image file
image_res = twelvelabs_client.embed.create(
    model_name="Marengo-retrieval-2.7",
    image_file="image-data.jpg",  # Replace with your desired image file
)

# Print details of the generated embedding
print(f"Created image embedding: model_name={image_res.model_name}")
print(f" Model: {image_res.model_name}")

# Extract and inspect the generated image embeddings
if image_res.image_embedding is not None and image_res.image_embedding.segments is not None:
    print_segments(image_res.image_embedding.segments)

# Store the embedding vector for search
vector_search = image_res.image_embedding.segments[0].embeddings_float
print("Generated Image Embedding Vector:", vector_search)

Key points:

  • The Marengo-retrieval-2.7 model is used to generate a dense vector embedding for the input image.
  • The embedding captures visual features such as shapes, colors, and patterns, enabling effective matching with video embeddings

Perform vector search in OpenSearch

After the image embedding is generated, you use it as a query vector to perform a k-nearest neighbor (kNN) search in OpenSearch:

# Perform vector search
query_vector = vector_search
image_to_video_search = search_similar_segments(query_vector)
# print(text_video_search)
    
print_search_results(image_to_video_search)

Expected output

The following shows video segments retrieved from OpenSearch based on their similarity to the input image.

Search Results:
--------------------------------------------------

Result 1:
Video: island.mp4
Time Range: 6.0 - 12.0
Similarity Score: 0.5616

Result 2:
Video: island.mp4
Time Range: 0.0 - 6.0
Similarity Score: 0.5576

Result 3:
Video: robin-bird.mp4
Time Range: 12.0 - 18.0
Similarity Score: 0.4592

Result 4:
Video: robin-bird.mp4
Time Range: 18.0 - 21.087732
Similarity Score: 0.4540

Observe that image of an ocean was used to search the videos. Video clips from the island video are retrieved with a higher similarity score in the first 2 results.

Clean up

To avoid charges, delete resources created while following this post. For Amazon OpenSearch Service domains, navigate to the AWS Management Console for Amazon OpenSearch Service dashboard and delete the domain.

Conclusion

The integration of TwelveLabs Embed API with OpenSearch Service provides a cutting-edge solution for advanced video search and analysis, unlocking new possibilities for content discovery and insights. By using TwelveLabs’ multimodal embeddings, which capture the intricate interplay of visual, audio, and textual elements in videos, and combining them with OpenSearch Service’s robust vector search capabilities, this solution enables highly nuanced and contextually relevant video search.

As industries increasingly rely on video content for communication, education, marketing, and research, this advanced search solution becomes indispensable. It empowers businesses to extract hidden insights from their video content, enhance user experiences in video-centric applications and make data-driven decisions based on comprehensive video analysis

This integration not only addresses current challenges in managing video content but also lays the foundation for future innovations in how we interact with and derive value from video data.

Get started

Ready to explore the power of TwelveLabs Embed API? Start your free trial today by visiting TwelveLabs Playground to sign up and receive your API key.

For developers looking to implement this solution, follow our detailed step-by-step guide on GitHub to integrate TwelveLabs Embed API with OpenSearch Service and build your own advanced video search application.

Unlock the full potential of your video content today!


About the Authors

James Le runs the Developer Experience function at TwelveLabs. He works with partners, developers, and researchers to bring state-of-the-art video foundation models to various multimodal video understanding use cases.

Gitika is an Senior WW Data & AI Partner Solutions Architect at Amazon Web Services (AWS). She works with partners on technical projects, providing architectural guidance and enablement to build their analytics practice.

Kruthi is a Senior Partner Solutions Architect specializing in AI and ML. She provides technical guidance to AWS Partners in following best practices to build secure, resilient, and highly available solutions in the AWS Cloud.

Planning for your IAM Roles Anywhere deployment

Post Syndicated from Liam Wadman original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/security/planning-for-your-iam-roles-anywhere-deployment/

IAM Roles Anywhere is a feature of AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) that enables you to use X.509 certificates from your public key infrastructure (PKI) to request temporary Amazon Web Services (AWS) security credentials. By using IAM Roles Anywhere, your workloads, applications, containers, or devices that run external to AWS can access AWS resources and perform tasks like backing up data to Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3), or use AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS) and the AWS encryption SDK to encrypt your data.

Before you start using IAM Roles Anywhere, it’s important to plan how you’ll integrate it with your PKI and with your applications running outside of AWS. In this blog post, we share considerations and best practices for integrating IAM Roles Anywhere with your PKI and applications.

Placing your trust anchor within your PKI

The first step when you configure IAM Roles Anywhere is to create a trust anchor. A trust anchor is a resource that represents your certificate authority (CA). A trust anchor can be a root CA or an intermediate or issuing CA.

The choice of which CA to use as your trust anchor within your PKI has implications for which end-entity certificates can be used with IAM Roles Anywhere and the security of your IAM Roles Anywhere deployment. Any valid end-entity certificate issued by your trust anchor, or a valid end-entity certificate issued by a CA that is beneath your trust anchor in your PKI’s hierarchy, can be used with IAM Roles Anywhere.

For example, in a three-level PKI where you select your root CA as your trust anchor, an end-entity certificate issued by your root, or an intermediate certificate authority below your root, can be used with this trust anchor for IAM Roles Anywhere, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: The useable end-entity certificates if you select a root CA as a trust anchor

Figure 1: The useable end-entity certificates if you select a root CA as a trust anchor

As shown in Figure 2, if you select Intermediate CA 2 (a CA two levels below the root) as your trust anchor for IAM Roles Anywhere, only end-entity certificates issued from Intermediate CA 2 could be used to get temporary AWS credentials with your IAM Roles Anywhere deployment.

Figure 2: The useable end entity certificates if you select a lower level or issuing certificate authority as a trust anchor

Figure 2: The useable end entity certificates if you select a lower level or issuing certificate authority as a trust anchor

In Figure 2, we selected Intermediate CA as our trust anchor and only end-entity certificates issued by Intermediate CA 2 can be used with IAM Roles Anywhere.

Selecting a root or higher-level intermediate CA will give you more flexibility when it comes to rotation of lower-level CAs, but might allow for more certificates than you intend to be able to access your AWS resources. Using a lower-level issuing CA will not allow certificates issued by other CAs within your PKI to be able to use IAM Roles Anywhere, even if they have identical attributes.

Certificates used as trust anchors must meet the following constraints:

  • The key usage MUST include Certificate Sign.
  • Basic constraints MUST include CA: true.
  • To use the certificate revocation list (CRL) functionality of IAM Roles Anywhere, the certificate used as a trust anchor MUST also contain the CRL Sign for key usage.
  • The certificate must not be issued by a public CA, or be a public CA.

Choosing your trust anchor: AWS Private CA compared to a self-managed PKI

If you already have an existing PKI and the capability to distribute certificates to your workloads, it’s likely that your existing PKI (which you have experience managing) will be a good choice to use as your IAM Roles Anywhere trust anchor.

However, if you’re looking to establish a PKI without the investment and maintenance costs of operating an on-premises CA, consider using AWS Private Certificate Authority (AWS Private CA). When you use this service, AWS hosts your CAs and allows you to issue certificates by using AWS API requests.

Consider the following when deciding whether to use AWS Private CA for your PKI:

  • Automatic rotation of your trust anchor: AWS Private CA is designed to integrate quickly with IAM Roles Anywhere, so you don’t need additional rotation of trust anchor certificates within IAM Roles Anywhere—this will be entirely managed in AWS Private CA.
  • Cost: There’s a cost to using AWS Private CA, which can make reusing your existing PKI more cost effective, if you have one. However, there are benefits to using AWS Private CA, such as automatic rotation, scalability, and resiliency, which can offset the cost of the service.
  • Scalability and availability: AWS Private CA is a highly scalable and available service across many AWS Regions. AWS Private CA also integrates with AWS Certificate Manager, so that you can conveniently manage certificate issuance and automate certificate renewals.
  • Resiliency: You can configure an identical AWS Private CA setup in another supported Region.
  • AWS API integration: You can use AWS Private CA to manage and issue certificates with AWS credentials, using IAM roles and temporary security credentials that are subject to the relevant AWS policies.
  • Technology integrations: AWS Private CA can integrate with technologies such as third-party certificate management services.
  • Certificate delivery: AWS Private CA hosts issuing certificates and issues certificates, but you’re responsible for getting certificates to your workloads. AWS Private CA can integrate with the cert-manager Kubernetes plugin, AWS Managed Microsoft AD, and Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP), in addition to other products and solutions.

For more information about implementing IAM Roles Anywhere with AWS Private CA, see this Security Blog post.

Working with end-entity certificates with IAM Roles Anywhere

In IAM Roles Anywhere, end-entity X.509 certificates are used to authenticate with the CreateSession API call. These end-entity certificates must meet the following constraints:

  • The certificates MUST be X.509v3.
  • Basic constraints MUST include CA: false.
  • The key usage MUST include Digital Signature.
  • The signing algorithm MUST include SHA256 or stronger. MD5 and SHA1 signing algorithms are rejected.

Most certificates issued today, such as those used to serve HTTPS requests or to perform mutual TLS (mTLS) authentication, meet these constraints. Those certificates could be used with IAM Roles Anywhere without changes.

Each end-entity’s certificate serial number doesn’t need to be unique, but it’s a best practice for each certificate issued by your certificate authority to have a unique serial number. The serial number of a certificate is used as the role session name of the IAM role session IAM Roles Anywhere creates, and this number can be used to associate events logged to AWS CloudTrail back to the end-entity certificate that was used to assume an IAM role.

IAM roles and workload identity

After you’ve planned for integration with your PKI, the next step when you set up IAM Roles Anywhere is to plan for how your workload identity will integrate with IAM Roles Anywhere and your PKI. The IAM role session that is created by calling CreateSession represents the identity and permissions of your external workloads within AWS.

To help you achieve least privilege, AWS recommends that you use a dedicated IAM role for each of your applications so that you can give each application only the permissions it requires to operate. For example, if you had two applications, Red and Blue, you would create a separate IAM role for each application and grant each role the IAM permissions it needs to do its job.

To make sure that the Red and Blue applications cannot access each other’s roles, you can restrict access by using X.509 attributes as tags in the trust policy for each IAM role. (See Certificate attribute mapping for more information on attributes.) For this example, we will use the Common Name (CN) attribute to restrict access for the Red application.

The following is a sample IAM role trust policy that lets the Red certificate from a trust anchor named ExampleCorpAnchor assume the role from IAM Roles Anywhere:

{
"Version": "2012-10-17",
    "Statement": [
      {
        "Effect": "Allow",
        "Principal": {
                    "Service": "rolesanywhere.amazonaws.com"
        },
        "Action": [
          "sts:AssumeRole",
          "sts:TagSession",
          "sts:SetSourceIdentity"
        ],
        "Condition": {
            "StringEquals": {
                "aws:PrincipalTag/x509Subject/CN": "Red"
          },
          "ArnEquals": {
                "aws:SourceArn": [
                    "arn:aws:rolesanywhere:us-east-1:111122223333:trust-anchor/ExampleCorpAnchor"
            ]
          }
        }
      }
    ]
  }

The role session created will have the SourceIdentity value in AWS set to be equal to the CN of the certificate. For example, the Red certificate would have a SourceIdentity value of CN=Red.

You can find a complete list of session tags and attributes used in IAM Roles Anywhere in the IAM Roles Anywhere documentation The session tags set on roles created with IAM Roles Anywhere are transitive and will be present on any further roles assumed by a role session that is created by IAM Roles Anywhere.

Rotating trust anchor certificates

When you’re using IAM Roles Anywhere with a self-hosted PKI for your trust anchor, you’re responsible for updating your trust anchor with the new CA certificate.

IAM Roles Anywhere supports up to two certificates configured within a trust anchor at a time. When it comes time to rotate the certificate authority used as your trust anchor, you can add your new certificate into the trust anchor so that certificates issued from either CA certificate can be used with IAM Roles Anywhere.

After you have both CA certificates in your trust anchor, you can migrate your workloads over to end-entity certificates issued by your new CA for a seamless migration without the need to update code or configurations on your workloads. After your workloads have migrated to your new certificate authority, you can remove the unused certificate from your trust anchor configuration.

IAM Roles Anywhere profiles and session policies

When you set up IAM Roles Anywhere, you create a profile to associate IAM roles with. A profile allows you to optionally apply a session policy.

Most customers deploy IAM Roles Anywhere by creating one profile for each IAM role that they configure. This gives you the flexibility to apply session policies to each application or IAM role in IAM Roles Anywhere without impacting other roles or applications. We recommend that customers use the one-profile-per-role approach to achieve more operational flexibility.

By using one profile across many different IAM roles, you can minimize configuration work and have a common session policy for the different IAM roles you have set up with IAM Roles Anywhere. This approach requires management of fewer AWS resources, but means that changes to the profile will impact a larger number of applications.

When you set a session policy on a profile, we recommend that you use a managed policy Amazon Resource Name (ARN), rather than the default in-line session policy ARN, because this allows you to have more IAM policy space. The most common use case we’ve seen for applying session policies with IAM Roles Anywhere profiles is restricting the IAM Roles Anywhere session to only expected IP address ranges, such as your on-premises data centers.

The role sessions created by IAM Roles Anywhere are subject to all relevant AWS policies, such as resource control policies (RCPs), service control policies (SCPs), resource policies, permissions boundaries, and VPC endpoint policies.

Working with distributed applications

If you have multiple deployments of an application, we recommend that, wherever possible, you use a unique certificate and key for each instance of that application. For example, this would apply if Blue is a distributed application, and each instance of the Blue application has a requirement to communicate with AWS resources. Sharing a key across distributed applications increases the risk a key could accidentally be made available to unauthorized parties when it’s copied and stored over a network.

By using a unique certificate and key for each instance, you can keep the private key on the server that is using IAM Roles Anywhere instead of needing to distribute the private key over the network, which is a best practice to help prevent exposure of a private key. IAM Roles Anywhere can use private keys and certificates that are stored in Trusted Platform Modules (TPMs), Windows and MacOS certificate stores, files on a file system, or in a hardware security module (HSM) that is accessible with the PKCS #11 protocol.

Because the certificates that are issued to each instance typically have different serial numbers, you can associate events in CloudTrail back to the actual instance of a workload that was issued a certificate. The IAM role session created by a certificate uses the certificate’s serial number as the role session name, which is visible in CloudTrail logs for actions taken by that role session.

Comparing short-lived and long-lived end entity certificates

X.509 certificates have an expiration date. The longer a credential is used, the greater the chance that it might come under the control of an unauthorized person.

We recommend that the certificates you issue to your workloads expire as quickly as your operational tolerances can withstand. For example, if you’re experienced in operating a PKI and can allow applications to request certificates through self-service, we recommend that the certificates issued have a relatively short expiration time so that new certificates must be requested frequently.

If your PKI certificates are issued or distributed manually, you might need to issue longer-lived certificates to ease your operational burden and give yourself longer periods of overlap in validity so that certificates can be rotated without disrupting your business.

It’s possible for multiple end-entity certificates to be valid at the same time with identical attributes. For example, if there were multiple non-expired, non-revoked CN=Red certificates, any of those CN=Red certificates can be used to access the CreateSessions API with IAM Roles Anywhere.

Certificate revocation

Traditionally, certificates are given a long validity period which helps reduce the operational burden for systems engineers who support certificates manually. However, sometimes you might need to revoke certificates for security reasons such as a compromised private key, a change in certificate fields, or a certificate that has been issued incorrectly. Certificate revocation helps maintain the trust and integrity of the PKI system.

A CRL is one of the primary mechanisms to help maintain the health of your PKI. The CRL contains information about the certificates that have been revoked due to security or other reasons.

IAM Roles Anywhere checks the validity of your certificates against your CRL. Using your PKI, after your certificate has been added to the CRL, you can import the CRL to IAM Roles Anywhere by using the using ImportCrl API operation or the import-crl CLI command. A copy of the CRL you import is hosted within IAM Roles Anywhere. After the CRL has been updated, IAM Roles Anywhere validates the certificate against your CRL before issuing credentials.

The fact that your CRL is hosted within IAM Roles Anywhere helps to mitigate a common scenario where the CRL is the target of a denial-of-service (DoS) attempt, causing applications to either deny all access because they’re unable to check the status of a cert against a CRL, or to let unauthorized users use revoked certificates to access services that are configured to ignore the CRL if it isn’t reachable.

Deployment patterns: centralized or decentralized

There are two approaches you can choose when deploying IAM Roles Anywhere: centralized or decentralized. We’ll look at the pros and cons of both.

Centralized trust anchor pattern

The following image describes how a centralized trust anchor would be deployed. First, a central trust anchor is deployed in a dedicated IAM account. Workloads then authenticate to IAM Roles Anywhere in a centralized account, and the workload performs role chaining to access the workload account.

Figure 3: Centralized trust anchor architecture pattern

Figure 3: Centralized trust anchor architecture pattern

In Figure 3, the workload running in the on-premises datacenter uses its certificate to get temporary AWS credentials from IAM Roles Anywhere in the IAM Roles Anywhere landing account. It then uses those credentials to assume a role into the workload account that hosts its AWS resources.

We recommend a centralized trust anchor pattern if you’re just getting started with IAM Roles Anywhere. This pattern simplifies the management and governance of IAM Roles Anywhere and allows you to scale with fewer resources to manage.

If you have more than one CA that you want to use with IAM Roles Anywhere, you can scale this pattern with multiple trust anchors in the same IAM Roles Anywhere landing account.

Pros of the centralized trust anchor pattern:

  • A simplified setup and fewer IAM Roles Anywhere resources to manage: Administrators only need to configure IAM Roles Anywhere profiles, roles, and trust anchors in one AWS account per Region.
  • Easier to manage CRLs: Because IAM Roles Anywhere is centralized, administrators only need to update the CRL in one account per Region.
  • Minimal application setup: Applications will need to set up role chaining to access their workloads accounts. Later in this post, we show you how to set up role chaining with IAM Roles Anywhere and the various AWS SDKs using a configuration that allows you to access other accounts without writing custom code.
  • Scaling: Based on the number of CAs you have, you can add additional trust anchors for additional CAs you want to use with IAM Roles Anywhere.

Cons of the centralized trust anchor pattern:

  • Cross-account access: The account that you’re creating for IAM Roles Anywhere will have access to other AWS accounts hosting your workloads. This might not meet your isolation requirements because it introduces cross-account access. However, remember that you can use certificate attributes in a role-trust policy to limit which workloads can access which AWS accounts.
  • Quotas: You might exceed your service quotas. For more information, see Quotas for AWS Identity and Access Management Roles Anywhere.

Considerations of the centralized trust anchor pattern:

  • Multiple trust anchors: IAM Roles Anywhere supports two certificates per trust anchor, to help with rotation of certificates, so that you don’t have to update the ARNs during certificate rotation.

    However, if there was a requirement to support multiple CAs, then it would be best to create separate trust anchors. For example, if you have a root CA and three issuing CAs, instead of creating a bundle of four certificates, you could create a trust anchor with a root CA, which would trust all certificates. Alternatively, you could create three different trust anchors per each issuing CA. So, it’s recommended to consider your PKI hierarchy during this process.

  • Auditing: If you have multiple trust anchors for different CAs deployed into the IAM Roles Anywhere account, you might need to use the aws:SourceARN condition key in role-trust policies to specify that that only a specific trust anchor can be used to assume a role with IAM Roles Anywhere.

When you use the centralized trust anchor pattern, you can use the certificate attributes to segregate access based on workloads, as described in the IAM roles and workload identity section earlier in this post.

Distributed trust anchor pattern

If you have more advanced security and compliance requirements, you can achieve greater isolation and granular access control by using a distributed (multi-trust-anchor, multi-account) approach with IAM Roles Anywhere.

In Figure 4, you see a distributed pattern where multiple trust anchors have been deployed based on which workloads and applications need access. In this model, the on-premises resource would call the respective trust anchor that has been mapped to each application to gain access to the AWS resource.

Figure 4: Multiple trust anchor, multi-account architecture pattern

Figure 4: Multiple trust anchor, multi-account architecture pattern

Based on your strategy, it’s possible to migrate from the centralized architecture to a distributed architecture as your organization grows or your operating model changes. Let’s looks at some of the considerations for this approach.

Pros of the distributed trust anchor pattern:

  • Better isolation: This pattern doesn’t require cross-account roles to be set up, and therefore AWS accounts and workloads are better isolated.
  • PKI flexibility: If you have different subordinate or issuing CAs that align with specific workloads or compliance requirements, you can have a distributed IAM Roles Anywhere setup for each workload in each AWS account.

Cons of the distributed trust anchor pattern:

  • Additional setup and AWS resources to manage: Trust anchors, profiles, and CRLs need to be set up in each AWS account that you want to use with IAM Roles Anywhere.
  • Additional configuration of applications: IAM Roles Anywhere ARNs will be different across accounts, and you will need to update the configuration of your applications that use IAM Roles Anywhere with the correct trust anchor and profile ARNs for each account.

Considerations of the distributed trust anchor pattern:

  • Scale: Infrastructure as code, such as AWS CloudFormation StackSets, can be used to scale the distributed pattern. Administrators can use AWS CloudFormation StackSets as a convenient way to implement trust anchors and profiles across accounts.

Working with IAM Roles Anywhere in your applications

Your applications integrate with IAM Roles Anywhere by using the aws signing helper (also known as the credential helper) with the AWS SDK. The signing helper is a lightweight executable written in Go that uses your private keys and certificate to authenticate to the IAM Roles Anywhere API and request temporary AWS credentials, and then delivers the credentials to your application.

The signing helper uses Go’s cryptographic libraries and doesn’t need specific versions of cryptographic software to be deployed into the environment where it runs, which helps it to run seamlessly and without conflict to other applications. The signing helper can use certificates and keys from OS certificate stores, TPMs, or locations on the file system.

The signing helper can run using the credential_process setting, as an IMDSv2-compatible server on localhost, or as a process that updates an AWS credentials file.

In most cases, we recommend that customers use the signing helper with the credential_process setting because this allows you to use IAM Roles Anywhere without setting up environment variables and also allows you to configure role chaining seamlessly. The AWS SDK will automatically attempt to refresh credentials that are retrieved by the signing helper when the helper is used with the credential_process setting when the AWS credentials are nearing expiration.

If you set up the [default] profile in the AWS configuration file (~.aws/credentials on Linux and MacOS, C:\Users\ USERNAME \.aws\credentials on Windows), the AWS SDK default credentials provider chain will be used by IAM Roles Anywhere, provided that there are no other AWS credentials configured in that environment in a higher priority in the default credential providers chain.

Note: As described in the AWS SDK documentation, the default credential providers will vary slightly based on the language and AWS SDK used. However, many credential providers support using the credential_process setting in the default profile.

Here’s an example default profile that will use IAM Roles Anywhere:

[profile default]
credential_process = ./aws_signing_helper credential-process --certificate </path/to/certificate> --private-key </path/to/private-key> --trust-anchor-arn arn:aws:rolesanywhere:<region>:<account>:trust-anchor/<TA_ID> --profile-arn arn:aws:rolesanywhere:<region>:<account>:profile/<PROFILE_ID> --role-arn arn:aws:iam::<account>:role/<role-name-with-path>

You can also use a non-default profile and call that profile explicitly in your code when creating a credential providers or session object. How your application calls the AWS profile and IAM Roles Anywhere will vary depending on which AWS SDK you use, but we recommend checking the documentation for each SDK, and wherever possible, reuse clients, sessions, or credential providers to avoid unneeded calls to the IAM Roles Anywhere service to get new credentials. Otherwise, workloads may use up more CreateSession quota than expected or introduce unexpected latency to your application while making unnecessary calls to get AWS credentials when it already has some.

Note: AWS SDKs call the IAM Roles Anywhere credential_process to get credentials each time a new credential provider, session, or client is created, depending on the SDK.

Many applications that are written using the AWS SDK use the default credentials providers chain, and might be compatible with IAM Roles Anywhere without additional configuration or code change when using the default profile.

As a best practice, if you have multiple different applications running on the same host and accessing AWS that have totally different security requirements, you should have them run as separate users on that host and avoid sharing configuration files.

Configuring role chaining with IAM Roles Anywhere

Role chaining means to use a role to assume a second role through the AWS Command Line Interface (AWS CLI) or API. For example, RoleA has permission to assume RoleB. You can enable User1 to assume RoleA by using User1’s long-term user credentials in the AssumeRole API operation. This returns RoleA short-term credentials. With role chaining, you can use RoleA’s short-term credentials to enable User1 to assume RoleB.

You can set up role chaining with IAM Roles Anywhere by using profiles in the AWS configuration file, without writing code to manage role chaining or sessions. In the following example, there is a default profile that references the rolesanywhere profile. Applications that use the default profile will automatically use the credentials from the rolesanywhere profile to assume the role specified by the role_arn value, without writing code to manage credentials.

[profile default]
role_arn = arn:aws:iam::<account>:role/<WorkloadRole>
source_profile = rolesanywhere
role_session_name = WorkloadRoleSessionName

[profile <rolesanywhere>]
credential_process = /bin/aws_signing_helper credential-process \ 
       --certificate </path/to/certificate> \ 
       --private-key </path/to/private-key> \ 
       --trust-anchor-arn arn:aws:rolesanywhere:<region>:<account>:trust-anchor/<TA_ID> \ 
       --profile-arn arn:aws:rolesanywhere:<region>:<account_A>:profile/<profile_id> \ 
       --role-arn arn:aws:iam::<account>:role/<IAMRALandingRole>

The diagram in Figure 5 describes what happens when the AWS SDK performs role chaining with SDK configuration.

Figure 5: A work sequence diagram detailing the interactions that happen when the AWS SDK reads the preceding config file

Figure 5: A work sequence diagram detailing the interactions that happen when the AWS SDK reads the preceding config file

The flow in Figure 5 is as follows:

  1. The AWS SDK reads the default profile and discovers it must get credentials from the specified source_profile.
  2. The AWS SDK reads the source profile and uses the configuration to request credentials from IAM Roles Anywhere.
  3. The AWS SDK then uses the credentials retrieved from the source_profile to call STS AssumeRole on the role workload role defined in the default profile.
  4. The AWS SDK returned the temporary AWS credentials for workload role, which can now be used to access AWS resources in the workload account.

Logging and monitoring

Teams and security analysts typically prefer to have visibility into all actions taken. To help with this goal, logging and monitoring is available across different notification channels for IAM Roles Anywhere.

For example, Amazon CloudWatch includes a list of service metrics:

  • CA certificate expiry: Checks whether the certificate in the trust anchor is due for expiry.
  • End entity certificate expiry: Checks whether the certificate used for vending temporary security credentials is due for expiry.

Using such information, you can set up alarms and email notifications to remind administrators or developers to rotate the certificates before they expire. It’s especially important to monitor the expiry of the certificates for the trust anchor so that workloads that use IAM Roles Anywhere can continue operations without business disruption.

Using notification events to help with certificate revocation, you can use automations to help with other certificate expiry events. Note that if you’re using AWS Certificate Manager, rotation is automatically handled for you. For more information, see Managed certificate renewal in AWS Certificate Manager.

Tip: IAM Roles Anywhere logs also include the field SourceIdentity, which can help when you’re trying to trace back which workloads are taking what actions in AWS. The SourceIdentity field is usually the common name (CN) of the certificate.

IAM Roles Anywhere and AWS Regions

IAM Roles Anywhere is a regional AWS service. Meaning that configurations for resources like profiles and trust anchors exist in the Region in which you configure them.

As a best practice, we recommend setting up IAM Roles Anywhere in the same Region as the resources you will be accessing (for example, if you’re using IAM Roles Anywhere to access AWS resources in the us-west-2 Region, you should configure IAMRA in the us-west-2 Region).

Credentials issued by IAM Roles Anywhere, like other AWS credentials, can be used to access resources in other Regions (for example, credentials acquired from IAM Roles Anywhere in the us-west-2 Region can be used to access resources in the ca-central-1 Region).

If required, you can have your application introduce logic to try to use IAM Roles Anywhere in different Regions by having different profiles defined for your IAM Roles Anywhere deployment in different Regions. The following Python example will attempt to get credentials from the profile rolesanywhere-uswest2 for IAM roles anywhere in the us-west-2 Region, and if that fails, it will then attempt to get credentials with the rolesanywhere-cacentral1 profile for the ca-central-1 Region.

import boto3

def get_session():
    try:
        #tries to create a session using the profile “rolesanywhere-uswest2”
        #add additional logic and logging, per your requirements
        return boto3.Session(profile_name='rolesanywhere-uswest2')
    except:
        #tries to create a session using the profile “rolesanywhere-cacentral1”
        #add additional logic and logging, per your requirements
        return boto3.Session(profile_name='rolesanywhere-cacentral1')

session = get_session()
sts_client = session.client('sts')
print(sts_client.get_caller_identity())

Conclusion

In this blog post, we showed you the considerations for selecting a CA to use as your trust anchor, considerations for mapping your workload identity to IAM roles, patterns for deploying IAM Roles Anywhere, and how to integrate IAM Roles Anywhere with your applications.

IAM Roles Anywhere is a great solution for companies that have a PKI and want to access AWS resources from outside AWS, without needing to use long-lived credentials for IAM users.

To learn more about IAM Roles Anywhere, see the feature’s documentation, this IAM Roles Anywhere workshop, or this re:Inforce presentation featuring Hertz.

If you have feedback about this post, submit comments in the Comments section below. If you have questions about this post, start a new thread on AWS Security, Identity, and Compliance re:Post or contact AWS Support.

Liam Wadman

Liam Wadman

Liam is a Principal Solutions Architect with the Identity Solutions team. When he’s not building exciting solutions on AWS or helping customers, he’s often found in the hills of British Columbia on his mountain bike. Liam points out that you cannot spell LIAM without IAM.

Meg Peddada

Meg Peddada

Meg is a Senior Partner Solutions Architect specializing in security, risk, and compliance. Her expertise spans governance, security automations, threat management, and architecture. In her spare time, she loves playing volleyball, arts and crafts, and finding new brunch experiences.

Build multi-Region resilient Apache Kafka applications with identical topic names using Amazon MSK and Amazon MSK Replicator

Post Syndicated from Subham Rakshit original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/big-data/build-multi-region-resilient-apache-kafka-applications-with-identical-topic-names-using-amazon-msk-and-amazon-msk-replicator/

Resilience has always been a top priority for customers running mission-critical Apache Kafka applications. Amazon Managed Streaming for Apache Kafka (Amazon MSK) is deployed across multiple Availability Zones and provides resilience within an AWS Region. However, mission-critical Kafka deployments require cross-Region resilience to minimize downtime during service impairment in a Region. With Amazon MSK Replicator, you can build multi-Region resilient streaming applications to provide business continuity, share data with partners, aggregate data from multiple clusters for analytics, and serve global clients with reduced latency. This post explains how to use MSK Replicator for cross-cluster data replication and details the failover and failback processes while keeping the same topic name across Regions.

MSK Replicator overview

Amazon MSK offers two cluster types: Provisioned and Serverless. Provisioned cluster supports two broker types: Standard and Express. With the introduction of Amazon MSK Express brokers, you can now deploy MSK clusters that significantly reduce recovery time by up to 90% while delivering consistent performance. Express brokers provide up to 3 times the throughput per broker and scale up to 20 times faster compared to Standard brokers running Kafka. MSK Replicator works with both broker types in Provisioned clusters and along with Serverless clusters.

MSK Replicator supports an identical topic name configuration, enabling seamless topic name retention during both active-active or active-passive replication. This avoids the risk of infinite replication loops commonly associated with third-party or open source replication tools. When deploying an active-passive cluster architecture for regional resilience, where one cluster handles live traffic and the other acts as a standby, an identical topic configuration simplifies the failover process. Applications can transition to the standby cluster without reconfiguration because topic names remain consistent across the source and target clusters.

To set up an active-passive deployment, you have to enable multi-VPC connectivity for the MSK cluster in the primary Region and deploy an MSK Replicator in the secondary Region. The replicator will consume data from the primary Region’s MSK cluster and asynchronously replicate it to the secondary Region. You connect the clients initially to the primary cluster but fail over the clients to the secondary cluster in the case of primary Region impairment. When the primary Region recovers, you deploy a new MSK Replicator to replicate data back from the secondary cluster to the primary. You need to stop the client applications in the secondary Region and restart them in the primary Region.

Because replication with MSK Replicator is asynchronous, there is a possibility of duplicate data in the secondary cluster. During a failover, consumers might reprocess some messages from Kafka topics. To address this, deduplication should occur on the consumer side, such as by using an idempotent downstream system like a database.

In the next sections, we demonstrate how to deploy MSK Replicator in an active-passive architecture with identical topic names. We provide a step-by-step guide for failing over to the secondary Region during a primary Region impairment and failing back when the primary Region recovers. For an active-active setup, refer to Create an active-active setup using MSK Replicator.

Solution overview

In this setup, we deploy a primary MSK Provisioned cluster with Express brokers in the us-east-1 Region. To provide cross-Region resilience for Amazon MSK, we establish a secondary MSK cluster with Express brokers in the us-east-2 Region and replicate topics from the primary MSK cluster to the secondary cluster using MSK Replicator. This configuration provides high resilience within each Region by using Express brokers, and cross-Region resilience is achieved through an active-passive architecture, with replication managed by MSK Replicator.

The following diagram illustrates the solution architecture.

The primary Region MSK cluster handles client requests. In the event of a failure to communicate to MSK cluster due to primary region impairment, you need to fail over the clients to the secondary MSK cluster. The producer writes to the customer topic in the primary MSK cluster, and the consumer with the group ID msk-consumer reads from the same topic. As part of the active-passive setup, we configure MSK Replicator to use identical topic names, making sure that the customer topic remains consistent across both clusters without requiring changes from the clients. The entire setup is deployed within a single AWS account.

In the next sections, we describe how to set up a multi-Region resilient MSK cluster using MSK Replicator and also show the failover and failback strategy.

Provision an MSK cluster using AWS CloudFormation

We provide AWS CloudFormation templates to provision certain resources:

This will create the virtual private cloud (VPC), subnets, and the MSK Provisioned cluster with Express brokers within the VPC configured with AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) authentication in each Region. It will also create a Kafka client Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) instance, where we can use the Kafka command line to create and view a Kafka topic and produce and consume messages to and from the topic.

Configure multi-VPC connectivity in the primary MSK cluster

After the clusters are deployed, you need to enable the multi-VPC connectivity in the primary MSK cluster deployed in us-east-1. This will allow MSK Replicator to connect to the primary MSK cluster using multi-VPC connectivity (powered by AWS PrivateLink). Multi-VPC connectivity is only required for cross-Region replication. For same-Region replication, MSK Replicator uses an IAM policy to connect to the primary MSK cluster.

MSK Replicator uses IAM authentication only to connect to both primary and secondary MSK clusters. Therefore, although other Kafka clients can still continue to use SASL/SCRAM or mTLS authentication, for MSK Replicator to work, IAM authentication has to be enabled.

To enable multi-VPC connectivity, complete the following steps:

  1. On the Amazon MSK console, navigate to the MSK cluster.
  2. On the Properties tab, under Network settings, choose Turn on multi-VPC connectivity on the Edit dropdown menu.

  1. For Authentication type, select IAM role-based authentication.
  2. Choose Turn on selection.

Enabling multi-VPC connectivity is a one-time setup and it can take approximately 30–45 minutes depending on the number of brokers. After this is enabled, you need to provide the MSK cluster resource policy to allow MSK Replicator to talk to the primary cluster.

  1. Under Security settings¸ choose Edit cluster policy.
  2. Select Include Kafka service principal.

Now that the cluster is enabled to receive requests from MSK Replicator using PrivateLink, we need to set up the replicator.

Create a MSK Replicator

Complete the following steps to create an MSK Replicator:

  1. In the secondary Region (us-east-2), open the Amazon MSK console.
  2. Choose Replicators in the navigation pane.
  3. Choose Create replicator.
  4. Enter a name and optional description.

  1. In the Source cluster section, provide the following information:
    1. For Cluster region, choose us-east-1.
    2. For MSK cluster, enter the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the primary MSK cluster.

For cross-Region setup, the primary cluster will appear disabled if the multi-VPC connectivity is not enabled and the cluster resource policy is not configured in the primary MSK cluster. After you choose the primary cluster, it automatically selects the subnets associated with primary cluster. Security groups are not required because the primary cluster’s access is governed by the cluster resource policy.

Next, you select the target cluster. The target cluster Region is defaulted to the Region where the MSK Replicator is created. In this case, it’s us-east-2.

  1. In the Target cluster section, provide the following information:
    1. For MSK cluster, enter the ARN of the secondary MSK cluster. This will automatically select the cluster subnets and the security group associated with the secondary cluster.
    2. For Security groups, choose any additional security groups.

Make sure that the security groups have outbound rules to allow traffic to your secondary cluster’s security groups. Also make sure that your secondary cluster’s security groups have inbound rules that accept traffic from the MSK Replicator security groups provided here.

Now let’s provide the MSK Replicator settings.

  1. In the Replicator settings section, enter the following information:
    1. For Topics to replicate, we keep the topics to replicate as a default value that replicates all topics from the primary to secondary cluster.
    2. For Replication starting position, we choose Earliest, so that we can get all the events from the start of the source topics.
    3. For Copy settings, select Keep the same topic names to configure the topic name in the secondary cluster as identical to the primary cluster.

This makes sure that the MSK clients don’t need to add a prefix to the topic names.

  1. For this example, we keep the Consumer group replication setting as default and set Target compression type as None.

Also, MSK Replicator will automatically create the required IAM policies.

  1. Choose Create to create the replicator.

The process takes around 15–20 minutes to deploy the replicator. After the MSK Replicator is running, this will be reflected in the status.

Configure the MSK client for the primary cluster

Complete the following steps to configure the MSK client:

  1. On the Amazon EC2 console, navigate to the EC2 instance of the primary Region (us-east-1) and connect to the EC2 instance dr-test-primary-KafkaClientInstance1 using Session Manager, a capability of AWS Systems Manager.

After you have logged in, you need to configure the primary MSK cluster bootstrap address to create a topic and publish data to the cluster. You can get the bootstrap address for IAM authentication on the Amazon MSK console under View Client Information on the cluster details page.

  1. Configure the bootstrap address with the following code:
sudo su - ec2-user

export BS_PRIMARY=<<MSK_BOOTSTRAP_ADDRESS>>
  1. Configure the client configuration for IAM authentication to talk to the MSK cluster:
echo -n "security.protocol=SASL_SSL
sasl.mechanism=AWS_MSK_IAM
sasl.jaas.config=software.amazon.msk.auth.iam.IAMLoginModule required;
sasl.client.callback.handler.class=software.amazon.msk.auth.iam.IAMClientCallbackHandler
" > /home/ec2-user/kafka/config/client_iam.properties

Create a topic and produce and consume messages to the topic

Complete the following steps to create a topic and then produce and consume messages to it:

  1. Create a customer topic:
/home/ec2-user/kafka/bin/kafka-topics.sh --bootstrap-server=$BS_PRIMARY \
--create --replication-factor 3 --partitions 3 \
--topic customer \
--command-config=/home/ec2-user/kafka/config/client_iam.properties
  1. Create a console producer to write to the topic:
/home/ec2-user/kafka/bin/kafka-console-producer.sh \
--bootstrap-server=$BS_PRIMARY --topic customer \
--producer.config=/home/ec2-user/kafka/config/client_iam.properties
  1. Produce the following sample text to the topic:
This is a customer topic
This is the 2nd message to the topic.
  1. Press Ctrl+C to exit the console prompt.
  2. Create a consumer with group.id msk-consumer to read all the messages from the beginning of the customer topic:
/home/ec2-user/kafka/bin/kafka-console-consumer.sh \
--bootstrap-server=$BS_PRIMARY --topic customer --from-beginning \
--consumer.config=/home/ec2-user/kafka/config/client_iam.properties \
--consumer-property group.id=msk-consumer

This will consume both the sample messages from the topic.

  1. Press Ctrl+C to exit the console prompt.

Configure the MSK client for the secondary MSK cluster

Go to the EC2 cluster of the secondary Region us-east-2 and follow the previously mentioned steps to configure an MSK client. The only difference from the previous steps is that you should use the bootstrap address of the secondary MSK cluster as the environment variable. Configure the variable $BS_SECONDARY to configure the secondary Region MSK cluster bootstrap address.

Verify replication

After the client is configured to talk to the secondary MSK cluster using IAM authentication, list the topics in the cluster. Because the MSK Replicator is now running, the customer topic is replicated. To verify it, let’s see the list of topics in the cluster:

/home/ec2-user/kafka/bin/kafka-topics.sh --bootstrap-server=$BS_SECONDARY \
--list --command-config=/home/ec2-user/kafka/config/client_iam.properties

The topic name is customer without any prefix.

By default, MSK Replicator replicates the details of all the consumer groups. Because you used the default configuration, you can verify using the following command if the consumer group ID msk-consumer is also replicated to the secondary cluster:

/home/ec2-user/kafka/bin/kafka-consumer-groups.sh --bootstrap-server=$BS_SECONDARY \
--list --command-config=/home/ec2-user/kafka/config/client_iam.properties

Now that we have verified the topic is replicated, let’s understand the key metrics to monitor.

Monitor replication

Monitoring MSK Replicator is very important to make sure that replication of data is happening fast. This reduces the risk of data loss in case an unplanned failure occurs. Some important MSK Replicator metrics to monitor are ReplicationLatency, MessageLag, and ReplicatorThroughput. For a detailed list, see Monitor replication.

To understand how many bytes are processed by MSK Replicator, you should monitor the metric ReplicatorBytesInPerSec. This metric indicates the average number of bytes processed by the replicator per second. Data processed by MSK Replicator consists of all data MSK Replicator receives. This includes the data replicated to the target cluster and filtered by MSK Replicator. This metric is applicable if you use Keep same topic name in the MSK Replicator copy settings. During a failback scenario, MSK Replicator starts to read from the earliest offset and replicates records from the secondary back to the primary. Depending on the retention settings, some data might exist in the primary cluster. To prevent duplicates, MSK Replicator processes the data but automatically filters out duplicate data.

Fail over clients to the secondary MSK cluster

In the case of an unexpected event in the primary Region in which clients can’t connect to the primary MSK cluster or the clients are receiving unexpected produce and consume errors, this could be a sign that the primary MSK cluster is impacted. You may notice a sudden spike in replication latency. If the latency continues to rise, it could indicate a regional impairment in Amazon MSK. To verify this, you can check the AWS Health Dashboard, though there is a chance that status updates may be delayed. Once you identify signs of a regional impairment in Amazon MSK, you should prepare to fail over the clients to the secondary region.

For critical workloads we recommend not taking a dependency on control plane actions for failover. To mitigate this risk, you could implement a pilot light deployment, where essential components of the stack are kept running in a secondary region and scaled up when the primary region is impaired. Alternatively, for faster and smoother failover with minimal downtime, a hot standby approach is recommended. This involves pre-deploying the entire stack in a secondary region so that, in a disaster recovery scenario, the pre-deployed clients can be quickly activated in the secondary region.

Failover process

To perform the failover, you first need to stop the clients pointed to the primary MSK cluster. However, for the purpose of the demo, we are using console producer and consumers, so our clients are already stopped.

In a real failover scenario, using primary Region clients to communicate with the secondary Region MSK cluster is not recommended, as it breaches fault isolation boundaries and leads to increased latency. To simulate the failover using the preceding setup, let’s start a producer and consumer in the secondary Region (us-east-2). For this, run a console producer in the EC2 instance (dr-test-secondary-KafkaClientInstance1) of the secondary Region.

The following diagram illustrates this setup.

Complete the following steps to perform a failover:

  1. Create a console producer using the following code:
/home/ec2-user/kafka/bin/kafka-console-producer.sh \
--bootstrap-server=$BS_SECONDARY --topic customer \
--producer.config=/home/ec2-user/kafka/config/client_iam.properties
  1. Produce the following sample text to the topic:
This is the 3rd message to the topic.
This is the 4th message to the topic.

Now, let’s create a console consumer. It’s important to make sure the consumer group ID is exactly the same as the consumer attached to the primary MSK cluster. For this, we use the group.id msk-consumer to read the messages from the customer topic. This simulates that we are bringing up the same consumer attached to the primary cluster.

  1. Create a console consumer with the following code:
/home/ec2-user/kafka/bin/kafka-console-consumer.sh \
--bootstrap-server=$BS_SECONDARY --topic customer --from-beginning \
--consumer.config=/home/ec2-user/kafka/config/client_iam.properties \
--consumer-property group.id=msk-consumer

Although the consumer is configured to read all the data from the earliest offset, it only consumes the last two messages produced by the console producer. This is because MSK Replicator has replicated the consumer group details along with the offsets read by the consumer with the consumer group ID msk-consumer. The console consumer with the same group.id mimic the behaviour that the consumer is failed over to the secondary Amazon MSK cluster.

Fail back clients to the primary MSK cluster

Failing back clients to the primary MSK cluster is the common pattern in an active-passive scenario, when the service in the primary region has recovered. Before we fail back clients to the primary MSK cluster, it’s important to sync the primary MSK cluster with the secondary MSK cluster. For this, we need to deploy another MSK Replicator in the primary Region configured to read from the earliest offset from the secondary MSK cluster and write to the primary cluster with the same topic name. The MSK Replicator will copy the data from the secondary MSK cluster to the primary MSK cluster. Although the MSK Replicator is configured to start from the earliest offset, it will not duplicate the data already present in the primary MSK cluster. It will automatically filter out the existing messages and will only write back the new data produced in the secondary MSK cluster when the primary MSK cluster was down. The replication step from secondary to primary wouldn’t be required if you don’t have a business requirement of keeping the data same across both clusters.

After the MSK Replicator is up and running, monitor the MessageLag metric of MSK Replicator. This metric indicates how many messages are yet to be replicated from the secondary MSK cluster to the primary MSK cluster. The MessageLag metric should come down close to 0. Now you should stop the producers writing to the secondary MSK cluster and restart connecting to the primary MSK cluster. You should also allow the consumers to read data from the secondary MSK cluster until the MaxOffsetLag metric for the consumers is not 0. This makes sure that the consumers have already processed all the messages from the secondary MSK cluster. The MessageLag metric should be 0 by this time because no producer is producing records in the secondary cluster. MSK Replicator replicated all messages from the secondary cluster to the primary cluster. At this point, you should start the consumer with the same group.id in the primary Region. You can delete the MSK Replicator created to copy messages from the secondary to the primary cluster. Make sure that the previously existing MSK Replicator is in RUNNING status and successfully replicating messages from the primary to secondary. This can be confirmed by looking at the ReplicatorThroughput metric, which should be greater than 0.

Failback process

To simulate a failback, you first need to enable multi-VPC connectivity in the secondary MSK cluster (us-east-2) and add a cluster policy for the Kafka service principal like we did before.

Deploy the MSK Replicator in the primary Region (us-east-1) with the source MSK cluster pointed to us-east-2 and the target cluster pointed to us-east-1. Configure Replication starting position as Earliest and Copy settings as Keep the same topic names.

The following diagram illustrates this setup.

After the MSK Replicator is in RUNNING status, let’s verify there is no duplicate while replicating the data from the secondary to the primary MSK cluster.

Run a console consumer without the group.id in the EC2 instance (dr-test-primary-KafkaClientInstance1) of the primary Region (us-east-1):

/home/ec2-user/kafka/bin/kafka-console-consumer.sh \
--bootstrap-server=$BS_PRIMARY --topic customer --from-beginning \
--consumer.config=/home/ec2-user/kafka/config/client_iam.properties

This should show the four messages without any duplicates. Although in the consumer we specify to read from the earliest offset, MSK Replicator makes sure the duplicate data isn’t replicated back to the primary cluster from the secondary cluster.

This is a customer topic
This is the 2nd message to the topic.
This is the 3rd message to the topic.
This is the 4th message to the topic.

You can now point the clients to start producing to and consuming from the primary MSK cluster.

Clean up

At this point, you can tear down the MSK Replicator deployed in the primary Region.

Conclusion

This post explored how to enhance Kafka resilience by setting up a secondary MSK cluster in another Region and synchronizing it with the primary cluster using MSK Replicator. We demonstrated how to implement an active-passive disaster recovery strategy while maintaining consistent topic names across both clusters. We provided a step-by-step guide for configuring replication with identical topic names and detailed the processes for failover and failback. Additionally, we highlighted key metrics to monitor and outlined actions to provide efficient and continuous data replication.

For more information, refer to What is Amazon MSK Replicator? For a hands-on experience, try out the Amazon MSK Replicator Workshop. We encourage you to try out this feature and share your feedback with us.


About the Author

Subham Rakshit is a Senior Streaming Solutions Architect for Analytics at AWS based in the UK. He works with customers to design and build streaming architectures so they can get value from analyzing their streaming data. His two little daughters keep him occupied most of the time outside work, and he loves solving jigsaw puzzles with them. Connect with him on LinkedIn.

Use AWS service reference information to automate policy management workflows

Post Syndicated from Ramesh Rajan original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/security/use-aws-service-reference-information-to-automate-policy-management-workflows/

Amazon Web Services (AWS) provides service reference information in JSON format to help you automate policy management workflows. With the service reference information, you can access available actions across AWS services from machine-readable files. The service reference information helps to address a key customer need: keeping up with the ever-growing list of services and actions in AWS. As new services launch and existing services expand their capabilities, you can now conveniently identify and incorporate available actions, resources, and condition keys for each AWS service into your policy authoring and validation workflows. As your business expands and your AWS footprint grows, you might decide to automate your policy management workflows. With the service authorization reference, you can build custom tools to make it easier to evaluate and use new actions, resources, and condition keys that AWS services introduce.

Getting started with service reference information

The service reference information is static information about the actions, resources, and condition keys available for each service in AWS. To obtain the list of AWS services for which reference information is available, go to the following URL:
https://servicereference.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/v1/service-list.json

This URL endpoint provides a JSON file that contains an up-to-date catalog of AWS services with available reference information. By querying this endpoint, you can retrieve the most current list of services supported by the AWS Service Reference Information feature.

To retrieve the list of actions, resources, and condition keys for a specific AWS service, go to the following URL:
https://servicereference.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/v1/<service-name>/<service-name>.json

Replace <service-name> with the name of the desired AWS service (for example, “s3” for Amazon Simple Storage service (Amazon S3) or “ec2” for Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2)). This URL endpoint provides a JSON file that contains the comprehensive list of actions, resources, and condition keys that are available for that particular service.

The following example shows the format of the output from the service-list.json file, which contains the service names and URLs for each service’s reference information:

[ 
    {
"service": "s3", 
        "url": "https://servicereference.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/v1/s3/s3.json" 
    }, 
    {
"service": "dynamodb", 
        "url": "https://servicereference.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/v1/dynamodb/dynamodb.json" 
    }, 
    …
]

You can navigate to the service information page by using the url field to view the list of permissions for the service. You can also download the JSON file to use in your policy authoring workflows. For example, you can download the permissions for Amazon S3 by following this URL:
https://servicereference.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/v1/s3/s3.json

The following example shows a partial output of the permissions for Amazon S3. The AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) actions are available in JSON format, and each action is its own JSON object. The Name field for those objects provides the name of the IAM action, the ActionConditionKeys field provides the available condition keys for this action, and the Resources field provides the available resources for this action.

{
  "Name" : "s3",
  "Actions" : [ {
    "Name" : "AbortMultipartUpload",
    "ActionConditionKeys" : [ "s3:AccessGrantsInstanceArn", "s3:AccessPointNetworkOrigin", "s3:DataAccessPointAccount", "s3:DataAccessPointArn", "s3:ResourceAccount", "s3:TlsVersion", "s3:authType", "s3:signatureAge", "s3:signatureversion", "s3:x-amz-content-sha256" ],
    "Resources" : [ {
      "Name" : "object"
    } ]
  }, {
    "Name" : "AssociateAccessGrantsIdentityCenter",
    "ActionConditionKeys" : [ "aws:ResourceTag/${TagKey}", "s3:ResourceAccount", "s3:TlsVersion", "s3:authType", "s3:signatureAge", "s3:signatureversion", "s3:x-amz-content-sha256" ],
    "Resources" : [ {
      "Name" : "accessgrantsinstance"
    } ],
    "Version": "v1.1" 
}

What can you build with the service reference information?

Let’s explore how you can make use of the service reference information through practical examples. To help you get started, here are two custom tools that use the service reference information. You can find these tools in our GitHub repository, ready for you to use and adapt to your specific needs. You can download the source code for these tools by visiting the following links:

SCP pre-processor

The SCP pre-processor provides a convenient way to write SCPs. You run the SCP pre-processor as a command-line tool. The tool takes a single, monolithic JSON file and runs a series of transformations and optimizations, then outputs a collection of valid service control policies that fit within policy size quotas. The tool uses AWS service reference information data in order to optimize lists of IAM actions.

Notification tool for new or removed IAM actions

You might find yourself needing to update various policies throughout your AWS environment when new IAM actions or services are released. You can use this tool to notify you when new services or new actions are added or removed. It works by downloading the service reference information and comparing it to the previous version of the file when the tool last ran. You can use these notifications to perform actions like automatically updating IAM policies when new actions are added or manually reviewing the notifications for new, sensitive actions.

Visit the source code repositories for the SCP pre-processor and the daily notification tool to learn more.

Conclusion

The AWS service reference information makes it easier for you to create automation for policy authoring and validation. By providing the AWS service actions reference in JSON format, this feature enables you to create custom tools for policy authoring and management.

We’re excited to know what kind of policy authoring tools you can think up.

 
If you have feedback about this post, submit comments in the Comments section below. If you have questions about this post, contact AWS Support.

Ramesh Rajan
Ramesh Rajan

Ramesh is a Senior Solutions Architect based out of San Francisco. He holds a Bachelor of Science in Applied Sciences and a Master’s in Cyber Security and Information Assurance. He specializes in cloud migration, cloud security, compliance, and risk management.
Matt Luttrell
Matt Luttrell

Matt is a Principal Solutions Architect on the AWS Identity Solutions team. When he’s not spending time chasing his kids around, he enjoys skiing, cycling, and the occasional video game.

Build a data lakehouse in a hybrid Environment using Amazon EMR Serverless, Apache DolphinScheduler, and TiDB

Post Syndicated from Shiyang Wei original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/big-data/build-a-data-lakehouse-in-a-hybrid-environment-using-amazon-emr-serverless-apache-dolphinscheduler-and-tidb/

While helping our customers build systems on AWS, we found out that a large number of enterprise customers who pay great attention to data security and compliance, such as B2C FinTech enterprises, build data-sensitive applications on premises and use other applications on AWS to take advantage AWS managed services. Using AWS managed services can greatly simplify daily operation and maintenance, as well as help you achieve optimized resource utilization and performance.

This post discusses a decoupled approach of building a serverless data lakehouse using AWS Cloud-centered services, including Amazon EMR Serverless, Amazon Athena, Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3), Apache DolphinScheduler (an open source data job scheduler) as well as PingCAP TiDB, a third-party data warehouse product that can be deployed either on premises or on the cloud or through a software as a service (SaaS).

Solution overview

For our use case, an enterprise data warehouse with business data is hosted on an on-premises TiDB platform, an AWS Global Partner that is also available on AWS through AWS Marketplace.

The data is then processed by an Amazon EMR Serverless Job to achieve data lakehouse tiering logic. Different tiering data are stored in separate S3 buckets or separate S3 prefixes under the same S3 bucket. Typically, there are four layers in terms of data warehouse design.

  1. Operational data store layer (ODS) – This layer stores raw data of the data warehouse
  2. Data warehouse stage layer (DWS) – This layer is a temporary staging area within the data warehousing architecture where data from various sources is loaded, cleaned, transformed, and prepared before being loaded into the data warehouse database layer;
  3. Data warehouse database layer (DWD) – This layer is the central repository in a data warehousing environment where data from various sources is integrated, transformed, and stored in a structured format for analytical purposes;
  4. Analytical data store (ADS) – This layer is a subset of the data warehousing that is specifically designed and optimized for a particular business function, department, or analytical purpose.

For this post, we only use ODS and ADS layers to demonstrate the technical feasibility.

The schema of this data is managed through the AWS Glue Data Catalog, and can be queried using Athena. The EMR Serverless Jobs are orchestrated using Apache DolphinScheduler deployed in cluster mode on Amazon Elasctic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) instances, with meta data stored in an Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) for MySQL instance.

Using DolphinScheduler as the data lakehouse job orchestrator offers the following advantages:

  • Its distributed architecture allows for better scalability, and the visual DAG designer makes workflow creation more intuitive for team members with varying technical expertise
  • It provides more granular task-level controls and supports a wider range of task types out-of-the-box, including Spark, Flink, and machine learning (ML) workflows, without requiring additional plugin installations;
  • Its multi-tenancy feature enables better resource isolation and access control across different teams within an organization.

However, DolphinScheduler requires more initial setup and maintenance effort, making it more suitable for organizations with strong DevOps capabilities and a desire for complete control over their workflow infrastructure.

The following diagram illustrates the solution architecture.

Prerequisites

You need to create an AWS account and set up an AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) user as a prerequisite for the following implementation. Complete the following steps:

For AWS account signing up, please follow up the actions guided per page link.

  1. Create an AWS account.
  2. Sign in to the account using the root user for the first time.
  3. One the IAM console, create an IAM user with AdministratorAccess Policy.
  4. Use this IAM user to log in AWS Management Console rather the root user.
  5. On the IAM console, choose Users in the navigation pane.
  6. Navigate to your user, and on the Security credentials tab, create an access key.
  7. Store the access key and secret key in a secure place and use them for further API access of the resources of this AWS account.

Set up DolphinScheduler, IAM configuration, and the TiDB Cloud table

In this section, we walk through the steps to install DolphinScheduler, complete additional IAM configurations to enable the EMR Serverless job, and provision the TiDB Cloud table.

Install DolphinScheduler on an EC2 instance with an RDS for MySQL instance storing DolphinScheduler metadata. The production deployment mode of DolphinScheduler is cluster mode. In this blog, we use pseudo cluster mode which has the same installation steps as cluster mode, and could achieve resource economy. We name the EC2 instance ds-pseudo.

Make sure the inbound rule of the security group attached to the EC2 instance allows port 12345’s TCP traffic. Then complete the following steps:

  1. Log in to Amazon EC2 as the root user, and install jvm:
    sudo dnf install java-1.8.0-amazon-corretto
    java -version

  2. Switch to dir /usr/local/src:
    cd /usr/local/src
  3. Install Apache Zookeeper:
    wget https://archive.apache.org/dist/zookeeper/zookeeper-3.8.0/apache-zookeeper-3.8.0-bin.tar.gz
    tar -zxvf apache-zookeeper-3.8.0-bin.tar.gz
    cd apache-zookeeper-3.8.0-bin/conf
    cp zoo_sample.cfg zoo.cfg
    cd ..
    nohup bin/zkServer.sh start-foreground &> nohup_zk.out &
    bin/zkServer.sh status

  4. Check the Python version:
    python3 --version

    The version should be 3.9 or above. It is recommended that you use Amazon Linux 2023 or later as the Amazon EC2 operating system (OS); Python version 3.9 meets the requirement. For detail information, refer to Python in AL2023.

  5. Install Dolphinscheduler
    1. Download the dolphinscheduler package:
      cd /usr/local/src
      wget https://dlcdn.apache.org/dolphinscheduler/3.1.9/apache-dolphinscheduler-3.1.9-bin.tar.gz
      tar -zxvf apache-dolphinscheduler-3.1.9-bin.tar.gz
      mv apache-dolphinscheduler-3.1.9-bin apache-dolphinscheduler
    2. Download the mysql connector package:
      wget https://downloads.mysql.com/archives/get/p/3/file/mysql-connector-j-8.0.31.tar.gz
      tar -zxvf mysql-connector-j-8.0.31.tar.gz
    3. Copy specific mysql connector JAR file to the following destinations:
      cp mysql-connector-j-8.0.31/mysql-connector-j-8.0.31.jar ./apache-dolphinscheduler/api-server/libs/
      cp mysql-connector-j-8.0.31/mysql-connector-j-8.0.31.jar ./apache-dolphinscheduler/alert-server/libs/
      cp mysql-connector-j-8.0.31/mysql-connector-j-8.0.31.jar ./apache-dolphinscheduler/master-server/libs/
      cp mysql-connector-j-8.0.31/mysql-connector-j-8.0.31.jar ./apache-dolphinscheduler/worker-server/libs/
      cp mysql-connector-j-8.0.31/mysql-connector-j-8.0.31.jar ./apache-dolphinscheduler/tools/libs/
    4. Add the user dolphinscheduler, and make sure the directory apache-dolphinscheduler and the files under it are owned by the user dolphinscheduler:
      useradd dolphinscheduler
      echo "dolphinscheduler" | passwd --stdin dolphinscheduler
      sed -i '$adolphinscheduler ALL=(ALL) NOPASSWD: NOPASSWD: ALL' /etc/sudoers
      sed -i 's/Defaults   requirett/#Defaults requirett/g' /etc/sudoers
      chown -R dolphinscheduler:dolphinscheduler apache-dolphinscheduler
  6. Install the mysql client:
    sudo dnf update -y 
    sudo dnf install mariadb105
  7. On the Amazon RDS console, provision an RDS for MySQL instance with the following configurations:
    1. For Database Creation Method, select Standard create.
    2. For Engine options, choose MySQL.
    3. For Edition: choose MySQL 8.0.35.
    4. For Templates: select Dev/Test.
    5. For Availability and durability, select Single DB instance.
    6. For Credentials management, select Self-managed.
    7. For Connectivity, select Connect to an EC2 compute resource, and choose the EC2 instance created earlier.
    8. For Database Authentication: choose Password Authentication.
  8. Navigate to the ds- mysql database details page, and under Connectivity & security, copy the RDS for MySQL endpoint.
  9. Configure the intance:
    mysql -h <RDS for mysql Endpoint> -u admin -p
    mysql> CREATE DATABASE dolphinscheduler DEFAULT CHARACTER SET utf8 DEFAULT COLLATE utf8_general_ci;
    mysql> exit;
  10. Configure the dolphinscheduler configuration file:
    cd /usr/local/src/apache-dolphinscheduler/
  11. Revise dolphinscheduler_env.sh:
    vim bin/env/dolphinscheduler_env.sh
    export DATABASE=${DATABASE:-mysql}
    export SPRING_PROFILES_ACTIVE=${DATABASE}
    export SPRING_DATASOURCE_URL="jdbc:mysql://ds-mysql.cq**********.us-east-1.rds.amazonaws.com/dolphinscheduler?useUnicode=true&amp;characterEncoding=UTF-8&amp;useSSL=false"
    export SPRING_DATASOURCE_USERNAME="admin"
    export SPRING_DATASOURCE_PASSWORD="<your password>"
  12. On the Amazon EC2 console, navigate to the instance details page and copy the private IP address.
  13. Revise install_env.sh:
    vim bin/env/install_env.sh
    ips=${ips:-"<private ip address of ds-pseudo EC2 instance>"}
    masters=${masters:-"<private ip address of ds-pseudo EC2 instance>"}
    workers=${workers:-" private ip address of ds-pseudo EC2 instance:default"}
    alertServer=${alertServer:-" private ip address of ds-pseudo EC2 instance "}
    apiServers=${apiServers:-" private ip address of ds-pseudo EC2 instance "}
    installPath=${installPath:-"~/dolphinscheduler"}
    export JAVA_HOME=${JAVA_HOME:-/usr/lib/jvm/jre-1.8.0-openjdk}
    export PYTHON_HOME=${PYTHON_HOME:-/bin/python3}
  14. Configure the dolphinscheduler configuration file:
    cd /usr/local/src/apache-dolphinscheduler/
    bash tools/bin/upgrade-schema.sh
  15. Install DolphinScheduler:
    cd /usr/local/src/apache-dolphinscheduler/
    su dolphinscheduler
    bash ./bin/install.sh
  16. Start DolphinScheduler after installation:
    cd /usr/local/src/apache-dolphinscheduler/
    su dolphinscheduler
    bash ./bin/start-all.sh
  17. Open the DolphinScheduler console:
    http://<ec2 ip address>:12345/dolphinscheduler/ui/login

After input the initial username and password, press Login button to enter into the dashboard shown as below.

initial user/password admin/dolphinscheduler123

Configure IAM role to enable the EMR serverless job

The EMR serverless job role needs to have permission to access a specific S3 bucket to read job scripts and potentially write results, and also have permission to access AWS Glue to read the Data Catalog which stores the tables’ meta data. For detailed guidance, please refer to Grant permission to use EMR Serverless or EMR Serverless Samples.

The following screenshot shows the IAM role configured with the trust policy attached.


The IAM role should have the following permissions policies attached, as shown in the following screenshot.

Provision the TiDB Cloud table

  1. To provision the TiDB Cloud table, complete the following steps:
    1. Register for TiDB Cloud.
    2. Create a serverless cluster, as shown in the following screenshot. For this post, we name the cluster Cluster0.
  2. Choose Cluster0, then choose SQL Editor to create a database named test:
    create table testtable (id varchar(255));
    insert into testtable values (1);
    insert into testtable values (2);
    insert into testtable values (3);

Synchronize data between on-premises TiDB and AWS

In this section, we discuss how to synchronize historical data as well as incremental data between TiDB and AWS.

Use TiDB Dumpling to sync historical data from TiDB to Amazon S3

Use the commands in this section to dump data stored in TiDB as CSV files into a S3 bucket. For full details on how to achieve a data sync from on-premises TiDB to Amazon S3, see Export data to Amazon S3 cloud storage. For this post, we use TiDB tool Dumpling. Complete the following steps:

  1. Log in to the EC2 instance created earlier as root.
  2. Run the following command to install TiUP:
    curl --proto '=https' --tlsv1.2 -sSf https://tiup-mirrors.pingcap.com/install.sh | sh
    
    cd /root
    source .bash_profile
    
    tiup --version

  3. Run the following command to install Dumpling:
    tiup install dumpling
  4. Run the following command to achieve target database table dumpling to the specific S3 bucket.
    tiup dumpling -u <prefix.root> -P 4000 -h <tidb serverless endpoint/host> -r 200000 -o "s3://<specific s3 bucket>" --sql "select * from <target database>.<target table>" --ca "/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt" --password <tidb serverless password>
  5. To acquire the TiDB serverless connection information, navigate to the TiDB Cloud console and choose Connect.

You can collect the specific connection information of test database from the following screenshot.

Yan can view the data stored in the S3 bucket on the Amazon S3 console.

You can use Amazon S3 Select to query the data and get results similar to the following screenshot, confirming that the data has been ingested into testtable.

Use TiDB Dumpling with a self-managed checkpoint to sync incremental data from TiDB to Amazon S3

To achieve incremental data synchronization using TiDB Dumpling, it’s essential to self-manage the check point of the target synchronized data. One recommended way is to store the ID of the final ingested record into a certain media (such as Amazon ElastiCache for Redis, Amazon DynamoDB) to achieve a self-managing checkpoint when running the shell/Python job that trigges TiDB Dumpling. The prerequisite for implementing this is that the target table has a monotonically increasing id field as its primary key.

You can use the following TiDB Dumpling command to filter the exported data:

tiup dumpling -u <prefix.root> -P 4000 -h <tidb serverless endpoint/host> -r 200000 -o "s3://<specific s3 bucket>" --sql "select * from <target database>.<target table> where id > 2" --ca "/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt" --password <tidb serverless password>

Use the TiDB CDC connector to sync incremental data from TiDB to Amazon S3

The advantage of using TiDB CDC connector to achieve incremental data synchronization from TiDB to Amazon S3 is that there is built-in change data capture (CDC) mechanism, and because the backend engine is Flink, the performance is fast. However, there is one trade-off: you need to create several Flink tables to map the ODS tables on AWS.

For instructions to implement the TiDB CDC connector, refer to TiDB CDC.

Use an EMR serverless job to sync historical and incremental data from a Data Catalog table to the TiDB table

Data usually flows from on premises to the AWS Cloud. However, in some cases, the data might flow from the AWS Cloud to your on-premises database.

After landing on AWS, the data will be wrapped up and managed by the Data Catalog by created Athena tables with the specific tables’ schema. The table DDL script is as follows:

CREATE EXTERNAL TABLE IF NOT EXISTS `testtable`(
  `id` string
) 
ROW FORMAT SERDE 'org.apache.hadoop.hive.serde2.OpenCSVSerde'
LOCATION 's3://<bucket_name>/<prefix_name>/';  

The screenshot below showcases the DDL running result using Athena console.

The data stored in testtable table is queried using select * from testable SQL. The query result is shown as follows:

In this case, an EMR serverless spark job can accomplish the work of synchronizing data from an AWS Glue table to your on premises table.

If the Spark job is written in Scala, the sample code is as below:

package com.example
import org.apache.spark.sql.{DataFrame, SparkSession}

object Main  {

  def main(args: Array[String]): Unit = {

    val spark = SparkSession.builder()
      .appName("<specific app name>")
      .enableHiveSupport()
      .getOrCreate()

    spark.sql("show databases").show()
    spark.sql("use default")
    var df=spark.sql("select * from testtable")

    df.write
      .format("jdbc")
      .option("driver","com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver")
      .option("url", "jdbc:mysql://<tidbcloud_endpoint>:4000/namespace")
      .option("dbtable", "<table_name>")
      .option("user", "<user_name>")
      .option("password", "<password_string>")
      .save()

    spark.close()
  }
}

You can acquire the TiDB serverless endpoint connection information on the TiDB console by choosing Connect, as shown earlier in this post.

After you have wrapped the Scala code as JAR file using SBT, you can submit the job to EMR Serverless with the following AWS Command Line Interface (AWS CLI) command:

export applicationId=00fev6mdk***

export job_role_arn=arn:aws:iam::<aws account id>:role/emr-serverless-job-role

aws emr-serverless start-job-run \
    --application-id $applicationId \
    --execution-role-arn $job_role_arn \
    --job-driver '{
        "sparkSubmit": {
            "entryPoint": "<s3 object url for the wrapped jar file>",
            "sparkSubmitParameters": "--conf spark.hadoop.hive.metastore.client.factory.class=com.amazonaws.glue.catalog.metastore.AWSGlueDataCatalogHiveClientFactory --conf spark.driver.cores=1 --conf spark.driver.memory=3g --conf spark.executor.cores=4 --conf spark.executor.memory=3g --jars s3://spark-sql-test-nov23rd/mysql-connector-j-8.2.0.jar"
        }
    }'

If the Spark job is written in PySpark, the sample code is as follows:

import os
import sys
import pyspark.sql.functions as F
from pyspark.sql import SparkSession

if __name__ == "__main__":

    spark = SparkSession\
        .builder\
        .appName("app1")\
        .enableHiveSupport()\
        .getOrCreate()

    df=spark.sql(f"select * from {str(sys.argv[1])}")

    df.write.format("jdbc").options(
        driver="com.mysql.cj.jdbc.Driver",
        url="jdbc:mysql://tidbcloud_endpoint:4000/namespace ",
        dbtable="table_name",
        user="use_name",
        password="password_string").save()

    spark.stop()

You can submit the job to EMR Serverless using the following AWS CLI command:

export applicationId=00fev6mdk***

export job_role_arn=arn:aws:iam::<aws account id>:role/emr-serverless-job-role

aws emr-serverless start-job-run \
    --application-id $applicationId \
    --execution-role-arn $job_role_arn \
    --job-driver '{
        "sparkSubmit": {
            "entryPoint": "<s3 object url for the python script file>",
            "entryPointArguments": ["testspark"],
            "sparkSubmitParameters": "--conf spark.hadoop.hive.metastore.client.factory.class=com.amazonaws.glue.catalog.metastore.AWSGlueDataCatalogHiveClientFactory --conf spark.driver.cores=1 --conf spark.driver.memory=3g --conf spark.executor.cores=4 --conf spark.executor.memory=3g --jars s3://spark-sql-test-nov23rd/mysql-connector-j-8.2.0.jar"
        }
    }'

The preceding PySpark code and AWS CLI command achieves outbound parameter input as well: the table name (specifically testspark) is ingested into the SQL sentence when submitting the job.

EMR Serverless job pperation essentials

An EMR Serverless application is a resource pool concept. An application holds a certain capacity of compute, memory, and storage resources for jobs running on it to use. You can configure the resource capacity using AWS CLI or the console. Because it’s a resource pool, EMR Serverless application creation is usually a one-time action with the initial capacity and maximum capacity being configured.

An EMR Serverless job is a working unit that actually processes the compute task. In order for a job to work, you need to set the EMR Serverless application ID, the execution IAM role (discussed previously), and the specific application configuration (the resources the job is planning to use). Although you can create the EMR Serverless job on the console, it’s recommended to create the EMR Serverless job using the AWS CLI for further integration with the scheduler and scripts.

For more details on EMR Serverless application creation and EMR Serverless job provisioning, refer to EMR Serverless Hive query or EMR Serverless PySpark job

DolphinScheduler integration and job orchestration

DolphinScheduler is a modern data orchestration platform. It’s agile to create high- performance workflows with low code. It also provides a powerful UI, dedicated to solving complex task dependencies in the data pipeline and providing various types of jobs out of the box.

DolphinScheduler is developed and maintained by WhaleOps, and available in AWS Marketplace as WhaleStudio.

DolphinScheduler has been natively integrated with Hadoop: DolphinScheduler cluster mode is by default recommended to be deployed on a Hadoop cluster (usually on HDFS data nodes), and the HQL scripts uploaded to DolphinScheduler Resource Manager are stored by default on HDFS, and can be orchestrated using the following native Hive shell command:

Hive -f example.sql

Moreover, for specific case in which the orchestration DAGs are quite complicated, each DAG consists of several jobs (for example, more than 300), and almost all the jobs are HQL scripts stored in DolphinScheduler Resource Manager.

Complete the steps listed in this section to achieve a seamless integration between DolphinScheduler and EMR Serverless.

Switch the storage layer of DolphinScheduler Resource Center from HDFS to Amazon S3

Edit the common.properties files under directories /usr/local/src/apache-dolphinscheduler/api-server/ and directory /usr/local/src/apache-dolphinscheduler/worker-server/conf. The following code snippet shows the part of the file that needs to be revised:

# resource storage type: HDFS, S3, OSS, NONE
#resource.storage.type=NONE
resource.storage.type=S3
# resource store on HDFS/S3 path, resource file will store to this base path, self configuration, please make sure the directory exists on hdfs and have read write permissions. "/dolphinscheduler" is recommended
resource.storage.upload.base.path=/dolphinscheduler

# The AWS access key. if resource.storage.type=S3 or use EMR-Task, This configuration is required
resource.aws.access.key.id=AKIA************
# The AWS secret access key. if resource.storage.type=S3 or use EMR-Task, This configuration is required
resource.aws.secret.access.key=lAm8R2TQzt*************
# The AWS Region to use. if resource.storage.type=S3 or use EMR-Task, This configuration is required
resource.aws.region=us-east-1
# The name of the bucket. You need to create them by yourself. Otherwise, the system cannot start. All buckets in Amazon S3 share a single namespace; ensure the bucket is given a unique name.
resource.aws.s3.bucket.name=dolphinscheduler-shiyang
# You need to set this parameter when private cloud s3. If S3 uses public cloud, you only need to set resource.aws.region or set to the endpoint of a public cloud such as S3.cn-north-1.amazonaws.com.cn
resource.aws.s3.endpoint=s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com

After editing and saving the two files, restart the api-server and worker-server by running the following commands, under folder path /usr/local/src/apache-dolphinscheduler/

bash ./bin/stop-all.sh
bash ./bin/start-all.sh
bash ./bin/status-all.sh

You can validate whether switching the storage layer to Amazon S3 was successful by uploading a script using DolphinScheduler Resource Center Console, check if the file appears in relevant S3 bucket folder.

Before verifying that Amazon S3 is now the storage location of DolphinScheduler, you need to create a tenant on the DolphinScheduler console and bundle the admin user with the tenant, as illustrated in the following screenshots:

After that, you can create a folder on the DolphinScheduler console, and check whether the folder is visible on the Amazon S3 console.

Make sure the job scripts uploaded from Amazon S3 are available in the DolphinScheduler Resource Center

After accomplishing the first task, you can upload the scripts from the DolphinScheduler Resource Center console, and confirm that the scripts are stored in Amazon S3. However, in practice, you need to migrate all scripts directly to Amazon S3. You can find and modify the scripts stored in Amazon S3 using DolphinScheduler Resource Center console. To do so, you can revise the metadata table t_ds_resources by inserting all the scripts’ metadata. The table schema of table t_ds_resources is shown in the following screenshot.

The insert command is as follows:

insert into t_ds_resources values(6, 'count.java', ' count.java','',1,1,0,'2024-11-09 04:46:44', '2024-11-09 04:46:44', -1, 'count.java',0);

Now there are two records in the table t_ds_resoruces.

You can access relevant records on the DolphinScheduler console.

The following screenshot shows the files on the Amazon S3 console.

Make the DolphinScheduler DAG orchestrator aware of the jobs’ status so the DAG can move forward or take relevant actions

As mentioned earlier, DolphinScheduler is natively integrated with the Hadoop ecosystem, and the HQL scripts can be orchestrated by the DolphinScheduler DAG orchestrator via Hive -f xxx.sql command. As a result, when the scripts changed to shell scripts or Python scripts (EMR Severless jobs needs to be orchestrated via shell scripts or Python scripts rather than the simple Hive command), the DAG orchestrator can start the job, but can’t get the real time status of the job, and therefore can’t continue the workflow to further steps. Because the DAGs in this case are very complicated, it’s not feasible to amend the DAGs; instead we follow a lift-and-shift strategy.

We use the following scripts to capture jobs’ status and take appropriate actions.

Persist the application ID list with the following code:

var=$(cat applicationlist.txt|grep appid1)
applicationId=${var#* }
echo $applicationId

Enable the DolphinScheduler step status auto-check using a Linux shell:

app_state
{
  response2=$(aws emr-serverless get-application --application-id $applicationId)
  application=$(echo $response1 | jq -r '.application')
  state=$(echo $application | jq -r '.state')
  echo $state
}

job_state
{
  response4=$(aws emr-serverless get-job-run --application-id $applicationId --job-run-id $JOB_RUN_ID)
  jobRun=$(echo $response4 | jq -r '.jobRun')
  JOB_RUN_ID=$(echo $jobRun | jq -r '.jobRunId')
  JOB_STATE=$(echo $jobRun | jq -r '.state')
  echo $JOB_STATE
}

state=$(job_state)

while [ $state != "SUCCESS" ]; do
  case $state in
    RUNNING)
         state=$(job_state)
         ;;
    SCHEDULED)
         state=$(job_state)
         ;;
    PENDING)
         state=$(job_state)
         ;;
    FAILED)
         break
         ;;
   esac
done

if [ $state == "FAILED" ]
then
  false
else
  true
fi

Clean up

To clean up your resources, we recommend using APIs through the following steps:

  1. Delete the EC2 instance:
    1. Find the instance using the following command:
      aws ec2 describe-instances 
    2. Delete the instance using the following command:
      aws ec2 terminate-instances –instance-ids <specific instance id>
  2. Delete the RDS instance:
    1. Find the instance using the following command:
      aws rds describe-db-instances
    2. Delete the instance using the following command:
      aws rds delete-db-instances –db-instance-identifier <speficic rds instance id>
  3. Delete the EMR Serverless application
    1. Find the EMR Serverless application using the following command:
      aws emr-serverless list-applications 
    2. Delete the EMR Serverless application using the following command:
       aws emr-serverless delete-application –application-id <specific application id>

Conclusion

In this post, we discussed how EMR Serverless, as AWS managed serverless big data compute engine, integrates with popular OSS products like TiDB and DolphinScheduler. We discussed how to achieve data synchronization between TiDB and the AWS Cloud, and how to use DolphineScheduler to orchestrate EMR Serverless jobs.

Try out the solution with your own use case, and share your feedback in the comments.


About the Author

Shiyang Wei is Senior Solutions Architect at Amazon Web Services. He is specializing in cloud system architecture and solution design for the financial industry. Particularly, he focused on big data and machine learning applications in finance, as well as the impact of regulatory compliance on cloud architecture design in the financial sector. He has over 10 years of experience in data domain development and architectural design.

Pilot light with reserved capacity: How to optimize DR cost using On-Demand Capacity Reservations

Post Syndicated from Antoine Boucherie original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/architecture/pilot-light-with-reserved-capacity-how-to-optimize-dr-cost-using-on-demand-capacity-reservations/

For digital enterprises to remain competitive, resilience is essential for maintaining reliability and building customer trust. End users expect applications to be available 24 hours a day, leading companies to develop increasingly sophisticated methods to provide continuous operation of critical services. Some companies, such as financial services companies, have to meet regulatory requirements such as Digital Operational Resilience Act (DORA) and are expected to manage the risk of outsourcing critical applications. They must design for high availability and plan for potential impairments. By proactively planning for potential disruptions, they’re not just mitigating risks – they’re building trust and delivering unparalleled value to their customers.

When assessing your own applications, you should define a set of objectives, perform a business impact analysis and a risk assessment. This way, you can estimate the impact to the business if the application isn’t available. This results in categorization of the applications and influence their design according to the AWS resilience lifecycle framework. Each application is given a specific Recovery Point Objective (RPO) and Recovery Time Objective (RTO), depending on its criticality for the business.

Not all applications fall in the most critical category. You allocate resources according to the results of the assessment and make trade-offs when designing applications. For example, you’ll have a more stringent RTO and RPO for—and be willing to spend more time and money on—a critical application than on a less critical application. The challenge becomes how to minimize the risk of breaching a specific RTO while optimizing for resources, such as cost and operational complexity.

At AWS, we provide guidance through the Well-Architected Framework and specifically within the Reliability pillar. Disruption can happen at several levels, and we recommend that you explore and prepare for four types of disruptions in the AWS Resilience Hub: application, infrastructure, Availability Zone, and AWS Region.

We recommend that you use managed services and make sure that all production workloads are designed to take advantage of multiple Availability Zones in AWS Regions. If your application also needs to be protected against the unlikely risk of Regional impairment, you should consider a multi-Region disaster recovery (DR) strategy.

You can select from several DR strategies: backup and restore, pilot light, warm standby, and multi-site active-active:

  • Backup and restore – This strategy might not provide the necessary RPO or RTO required for a highly critical application.
  • Multi-site active-active – This strategy increases significantly the cost and operational complexity of your application.
  • Pilot light – This strategy allows for a RPO or RTO in the tens of minutes by having the data asynchronously copied to the secondary Region and ready to be accessed. However, unlike a warm standby, the application servers aren’t deployed and aren’t ready to serve traffic. The pilot light strategy allows for a lower cost but brings a risk that you might not be able to provision the compute capacity you need when you want to fail over to the secondary Region, especially if you require a specific instance type.

In this post, we explore an intermediate strategy between the pilot light and the warm standby strategies: pilot light with reserved capacity. You can use this strategy to reserve compute capacity in a secondary Region while also limiting cost.

The following diagram illustrates where the pilot light with reserved capacity solution lies in the spectrum of disaster recovery strategies.

spectrum of disaster recovery strategies

Reserving capacity, on demand

On-Demand Capacity Reservations were launched in 2018. They make it possible to reserve capacity in the Availability Zone of your choice without a long-term contract. You have the flexibility to create, modify, or cancel reservations at your discretion. It’s especially well-suited if your application is dependent on a specific instance type or size.

Optimizing the cost of On-Demand Capacity Reservations with a Savings Plan

On-Demand Capacity Reservations is a reservation mechanism and doesn’t require a commitment. However, you can optimize your spending by combining the capacity reservation with an AWS Savings Plan. By using Savings Plans, you can achieve up to a 72% discount, a very significant cost reduction for DR instances that have to stay available all year long.

Optimizing the cost of On-Demand Capacity Reservations by sharing Capacity Reservations

To further optimize the cost, you can use your reserved capacity in another account when you don’t need it for DR.

Here’s an example in which we share On-Demand Capacity Reservations with our development and test account:

We have a three-tier application running in production in a primary AWS Region. This application is composed of a load balancer forwarding traffic to a fleet of application servers running on Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) instances, backed by an Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) database. All services used by this application are configured to use multiple Availability Zones in this primary Region.

We use the pilot light strategy, so the application data is being replicated to the disaster recovery environment in a secondary Region using Amazon RDS cross-Region read replicas. However, the load balancer and EC2 services aren’t running in DR to limit cost and operational complexity. Following best practices, each environment is running in a different AWS account.

The following diagram illustrates the pilot light strategy setup for our example.

pilot light strategy setup for our example

To reserve capacity in case of failover to the secondary Region, we create an On-Demand Capacity Reservation in the DR account, according to our baseline compute capacity. Because we don’t need this capacity until we fail over the application from the primary to the secondary Region, we share those On-Demand Capacity Reservations with a development and test account hosting our nonproduction environment in the secondary Region. On-Demand Capacity Reservations are Availability Zone specific (and hence Region specific) and can be shared with either AWS accounts or AWS Organizations using AWS Resource Access Manager (AWS RAM).

Best practices are to share those On-Demand Capacity Reservations with a nonproduction organizational unit (OU) within an organization or to directly share with the account(s) hosting the testing environments (for example, user acceptance testing or preproduction). Those environments are usually very similar to the production account in baseline sizing, in order to perform load and performance testing. This is an important point: you want to be able to retrieve those On-Demand Capacity Reservations when needed without impacting other critical applications.

The following diagram illustrates the Capacity Reservations sharing with the development and test account.

Capacity Reservation sharing with development and test account

If an impairment affects our production environment in the primary Region, we can trigger failover to the secondary Region. To reclaim capacity, we need to terminate the EC2 instances running in our development and test account. Capacity becomes available nearly immediately after these instances are successfully terminated. Separately, we can also stop the sharing of On-Demand Capacity Reservations to make sure that the development and test account can’t consume that capacity again. Know that merely unsharing your reservation without terminating development and test instances might not result in complete or immediate capacity retrieval. This is because when you unshare an On-Demand Capacity Reservation, the instances in the consumer account continue to run, and capacity is only returned to the owner account if additional capacity is available in the Amazon EC2 service on-demand pool.

The following diagram illustrates the failover to the DR environment in a secondary Region.

cancellation of the capacity reservations sharing

Steps

Here is a possible approach to take advantage of On-Demand Capacity Reservations to reduce the application’s total infrastructure cost:

  1. Calculate the baseline compute capacity necessary for the DR environment in the secondary Region in the event of failover, including the compute that might already be running in this secondary Region for data stores (for example, a Kafka broker running on Amazon EC2). How much vCPU and RAM is required or what are the exact EC2 instances necessary to host the whole application in case of failover of the production from the primary to the secondary Region.
  2. Create an On-Demand Capacity Reservation for the exact EC2 instances that the application need as a baseline in the DR account. Capacity Reservation Fleet is also a possible choice to reserve capacity across multiple instance types, which is often the case for Amazon Elastic Kubernetes Service (Amazon EKS) or Amazon Elastic Container Service (Amazon ECS) clusters, for example. Creating a Capacity Reservation Fleet will create multiple Capacity Reservations that can be shared independently. It’s also recommended to apply for Savings Plans on those On-Demand Capacity Reservations to save up to 72%.
  3. Share those On-Demand Capacity Reservations from the DR account to one or several accounts, depending on your need. In our example, we share the On-Demand Capacity Reservations with the development and test account, effectively allowing the development and test environment to use compute capacity that has already been reserved.
  4. In case of impairment in the primary Region, terminate the development and test instances first and then stop the On-Demand Capacity Reservation sharing The DR account will recover those reservations. If you want to keep the development and test instances, you will be charged at the on-demand rate.
  5. Redeploy in an automated manner the application in the DR account on new EC2 instances behind a load balancer.

Benefits

By purchasing On-Demand Capacity Reservations in the DR account, you make sure that you always have Amazon EC2 capacity access when required and for as long as you need it. By sharing those On-Demand Capacity Reservations with another AWS account or organization, you can share the cost of the application’s compute capacity with other environments, reducing your application’s total cost of ownership. The additional cost of the DR instances can even reach zero, if your instances are completely consumed by nonproduction environments such as development and testing.

DR savings over On-Demand
Compute Savings Plan – 1 year, no upfront Around 27% (for example, for m7i instance)
Compute Savings Plan – 3 years, all upfront Up to 66%
Instance Savings Plan – 3 years, all upfront Up to 72%
Reservation shared and consumed 100% by development and test environment Up to 100%

Limits

Although you can reserve DR capacity at a minimal cost using the pilot light with reserved capacity solution, there are some limits to keep in mind.

Firstly, we advise looking at this solution only if the Recovery Time Objective of the application, in case of Regional disruption, is in hours because you need to take into account the time needed to:

  • Detect the impairment in the primary Region.
  • Trigger the failover procedure.
  • Terminate the used instances to retrieve capacity (estimated time in minutes)
  • Stop the On-Demand Capacity Reservations sharing and automatically retrieve them in the DR account (estimated time in minutes).
  • Launch the compute infrastructure with the necessary application software in the DR account. You need to make sure that it matches the On-Demand Capacity Reservations according to the criteria used (open or targeted)

If your application requires a lower RTO, we recommend exploring the warm standby strategy.

Secondly, this strategy can only be used for application servers running EC2 instances and ECS or EKS clusters on EC2 because On-Demand Capacity Reservations aren’t available for managed services such as AWS Fargate or AWS Lambda. For those managed services, we recommend having them up and running like in a warm standby strategy, with a minimum baseline capacity that you’re comfortable with.

Thirdly, it requires some nonproduction development and test usage in the selected secondary Region to use the shared On-Demand Capacity Reservation.

Finally, it’s important to consider that this solution brings some complexity and extra operational work. You should plan well ahead, automate the operational tasks where possible, but most importantly, regularly test that the failover of the application works according to plan. We encourage you to perform your own game days to support your operational resilience.

Deciding whether this strategy is a good fit for your application will ultimately be a decision based on your business and regulatory requirements.

Conclusion

In this post, we explained how to reserve capacity in a secondary Region using On-Demand Capacity Reservations. We highlighted how cost can be optimized using Savings Plans and by sharing reserved capacity with noncritical workloads. We saw how we can recover that capacity for the DR environment, in the event of a disaster, to allow the application to continue to serve end users. We looked at the benefits and limits of the pilot light with reserved capacity solution and the necessary steps to put it in place.


About the Authors

Manage authorization within a containerized workload using Amazon Verified Permissions

Post Syndicated from Manuel Heinkel original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/security/manage-authorization-within-a-containerized-workload-using-amazon-verified-permissions/

Containerization offers organizations significant benefits such as portability, scalability, and efficient resource utilization. However, managing access control and authorization for containerized workloads across diverse environments—from on-premises to multi-cloud setups—can be challenging.

This blog post explores four architectural patterns that use Amazon Verified Permissions for application authorization in Kubernetes environments. Verified Permissions is a scalable permissions management and fine-grained authorization service for your applications.

In this blog post, we cover the following patterns and discuss their trade-offs:

  • Calling Verified Permissions from an Amazon API Gateway API fronting your application in Kubernetes
  • Calling Verified Permissions from a Kubernetes Ingress controller component
  • Calling Verified Permissions from a sidecar container running in the same pod as the application container
  • Calling Verified Permissions from the application container

Understanding these patterns and their implications can help you implement secure and consistent authorization mechanisms across your entire infrastructure without compromising the scalability, portability, and resource efficiency of your containerized workloads.

Consistent authorization through centralized policy management

Access to application resources can be secured more effectively with a centralized and consistent approach to authorization. Especially in containerized environments with distributed architectures and shared resources, traditional access control methods, like embedding authorization logic within individual application code or relying on local access control policies, can become difficult to manage and prone to errors. This becomes even more challenging when you have a combination of on-premises and cloud setups.

A centralized authorization solution empowers developers to implement consistent access control across individual components of an application efficiently. Benefits include reduced duplicate work, an improved security posture, and lower complexity in managing and enforcing access control policies.

Verified Permissions benefits in a containerized environment

Amazon Verified Permissions provides several key benefits as an external authorization service:

  • Benefits for the platform engineering team – Centralized authorization enables platform engineering teams to implement, maintain, and govern authorization policies across the organization without requiring changes to individual applications. This aligns with modern platform engineering practices, where platform engineering teams can provide authorization as a service to application teams, promoting consistent security standards while reducing the operational burden on development teams.
  • Consistent authorization across environments – With Verified Permissions, you can define and manage access control policies in a centralized location. This makes it easier to apply consistent authorization rules across your entire infrastructure, including on-premises deployments and different cloud environments.
  • Simplified application development – Externalizing authorization logic from applications reduces development complexity. Developers can focus on core application functionality without having to implement and maintain authorization mechanisms within each service or component. This separation of concerns promotes code modularity, reusability, and faster iteration cycles.
  • Scalable and highly available – Verified Permissions is a managed service, designed to be scalable and highly available out of the box. As your containerized workloads grow in scale and complexity, Verified Permissions can handle increasing authorization request volumes while maintaining performance and availability.
  • Fine-grained access control – Verified Permissions supports attribute-based access control (ABAC) and role-based access control (RBAC). This allows you to define granular policies in the open source Cedar language based on various attributes like user roles, resource properties, environmental factors, and more.

Integration patterns for authorization

Kubernetes provides many options for architecting applications. Therefore, there are multiple locations in a typical architecture where authorization decisions can be enforced, as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: Integration points for authorization in containerized workloads

Figure 1: Integration points for authorization in containerized workloads

The workflow is as follows:

  1. API Gateway. Organizations can use entry points to the application outside of the Kubernetes cluster, such as an API gateway, to obtain an authorization decision. In AWS, Amazon API Gateway enables customers to use authorizer Lambda functions to send an authorization request to Verified Permissions.
  2. Ingress controller. The Kubernetes API defines Ingress objects, which provide load balancing and routing functions on layer 7. Common Ingress controllers like Traefik offer the option to integrate external authorization services.
  3. Sidecar proxy container. You can intercept every request routed to the application by using a sidecar container running in the same pod as the application container. This sidecar container calls Verified Permissions for authorization decisions.
  4. Application container. Developers can use the Amazon SDK to communicate with Verified Permissions from inside the application when an authorization decision is needed.

In the following sections, we explore each of these patterns in detail, examining their implementation, use cases, and specific considerations. At the end of our discussion, we provide a comprehensive comparison table to help you choose the most appropriate pattern based on factors such as scalability, performance, maintenance overhead, and specific use case requirements. This will help you make an informed decision about which pattern best suits your application’s needs.

Authorization workflow

Independent of which of the four mentioned options for authorization you choose, the overall authorization workflow, shown in Figure 2, will stay the same.

Figure 2: Authorization workflow with Amazon Verified Permissions

Figure 2: Authorization workflow with Amazon Verified Permissions

The workflow is as follows:

  1. Authentication. The user first authenticates with an identity provider to obtain a JSON Web Token (JWT). You can configure the identity provider to write relevant information like user roles, tenant ID, or other needed user attributes into the JWT. You can then use this information later to make an authorization decision.
  2. API request. The user makes a request to your application that includes the JWT.
  3. Authorization information. Your application extracts the relevant information that is needed to make an authorization decision from the request. This can include principal information from the JWT, information about the resource that the user requests, and what action the user wants to perform.
  4. (Optional) Policy information point lookup. Depending on your policies, you might need additional information in order for Verified Permissions to make an authorization decision. For example, you can query ownership details for a document from a database.
  5. Authorization decision. You then send the relevant information to Verified Permissions, which returns a decision stating whether the request is permitted or forbidden.
  6. Authorization enforcement. You then enforce the decision from Verified Permissions in your application by allowing or denying an action. For a REST API, this would result in sending back an HTTP 403 forbidden status if the request was denied, or processing the request if it was allowed and sending an HTTP 200 OK status.

Authorization outside of the cluster by using Amazon API Gateway

In this pattern, authorization decisions are made at the API gateway layer before requests reach the Kubernetes cluster. When a request arrives at the API gateway, it triggers an authorization check with Verified Permissions to evaluate the request against defined policies. Based on the Verified Permissions response, the gateway either forwards the request to the containerized application or denies access.

This pattern excels in scenarios where you need coarse-grained access control that can be enforced with information accessible at the API level (such as an HTTP header or ID or access token) and that supports RBAC and ABAC. Consider a document management application where different users have access to different documents based on group membership or identity attribute.

This approach to authorization works consistently regardless of whether your application runs in containers, virtual machines, or serverless environments. The API gateway acts as a unified control point for enforcing access policies across backend services.

For implementations that use Amazon API Gateway specifically, you can use Lambda authorizers to integrate with Verified Permissions. For each incoming API request, API Gateway invokes the authorizer Lambda function, which makes a call to Verified Permissions to evaluate the request against the defined authorization policies, as shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Integration of Amazon Verified Permissions in Amazon API Gateway

Figure 3: Integration of Amazon Verified Permissions in Amazon API Gateway

AWS provides a quick-start solution that demonstrates this integration by using Amazon API Gateway and Amazon Cognito, making it easier to implement this pattern. The setup process is detailed in the blog post Authorize API Gateway APIs using Amazon Verified Permissions and Amazon Cognito or bring your own identity provider.

Authorization in a Kubernetes Ingress

Another option to implement coarse-grained access control in use cases as described in the previous section is to use a Kubernetes Ingress layer. Some customers prefer Kubernetes-native solutions, especially if they need to run Kubernetes clusters within and outside of AWS.

Kubernetes provides an API to create and maintain Ingress objects, operating at layer 7 (the application layer), which enables routing decisions based on HTTP attributes. This layer 7 capability makes Ingress controllers ideal for implementing authorization checks.

One Kubernetes Ingress controller that supports external authorization is Traefik Proxy. With this feature, you can delegate authorization decisions to an external service like Verified Permissions before routing requests to the application container.

Assuming that the authorization endpoint is backed by a service in the same Kubernetes cluster, the architecture looks as shown in Figure 4.

Figure 4: Integration of Amazon Verified Permissions in a Kubernetes Ingress

Figure 4: Integration of Amazon Verified Permissions in a Kubernetes Ingress

The workflow is as follows:

  1. Authenticated users access the service through an Elastic Load Balancer of type Network Load Balancer (NLB).
  2. The NLB—operating at layer 4—exposes a Kubernetes Ingress inside the cluster that provides layer 7 capabilities. The Ingress object is implemented by an Ingress controller that supports external authorization, as described earlier.
  3. The Ingress forwards the request—or parts of it—that needs authorization to a local authorization service in the cluster. We use a dedicated authorization service in this architecture because the Ingress backend service allows an external endpoint to be called for authorization.
  4. The authorization service is deployed into its own Kubernetes namespace with a dedicated Kubernetes service account. EKS Pod Identity provides the ability to link the service account in this namespace to an AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that grants access to Verified Permissions by injecting temporary AWS access credentials into the pod at runtime.
  5. The authorization service extracts relevant information from the request and sends it to Verified Permissions for an authorization decision.
  6. The Ingress for the backend service awaits the response of the authorization service and forwards it to the backend service, if access is granted. The Ingress expects the authorization service to respond with HTTP status code 200 for authorized requests. If the Ingress receives HTTP status code 403, the requester is not allowed to access the requested resource, and the Ingress will block the request at this stage.
  7. Only authorized requests are forwarded to registered backend pods.

Because integration with external authorization services is not part of the Kubernetes Ingress API, you need to consult the documentation of the Ingress controller that you decide to use to determine the availability of this feature and its implementation details. Forward authentication of the Traefik Kubernetes Ingress supports this pattern and can be configured with the vendor-specific annotations described in the Traefik documentation.

Authorization in sidecar containers

Not all Ingress controllers support integration with an external authorization service. Amazon Elastic Kubernetes Service (Amazon EKS) customers might prefer the AWS Load Balancer Controller to manage the lifecycle of NLBs and ALBs for their services. Customers can continue using their existing Ingress controller, even if it does not support calling external authorization services today. You can move the authorization of requests behind the Ingress layer with the sidecar container pattern.

Sidecar containers are a common pattern for extending an application’s functionality in Kubernetes. A sidecar is a container running in the same pod as the application it relates to. This means that the sidecar and application follow the same lifecycle and share resources, such as the network ID. This pattern is a good fit when the authorization logic is service-specific. Because the authorization service is deployed alongside the application, this pattern also provides better support in situations where changes to the application demand changes in the authorization logic.

Consider a document management system where access control depends on document metadata and team structures. When a user attempts to edit a document, the sidecar queries the document’s metadata, such as the classification level, tags, and department ownership. The sidecar can also check the organizational team hierarchy to understand reporting relationships and access privileges. This context enables fine-grained authorization decisions that consider not just who the user is, but also, for example, their organizational context or the individual document’s metadata.

Although it’s possible to configure sidecar proxies such as Envoy for individual pods manually, the more convenient option is to introduce a service mesh. A service mesh provides a control plane to manage proxies, including centralized configuration, automated injection of sidecars, and an Ingress layer for traffic routing. Istio is a popular option for a service mesh in Kubernetes.

The diagram in Figure 5 shows the deployment architecture to implement authorization with Verified Permissions in a service mesh.

Figure 5: Integration of Amazon Verified Permissions in a Kubernetes Ingress

Figure 5: Integration of Amazon Verified Permissions in a Kubernetes Ingress

The workflow is as follows:

  1. Authenticated users access the application through an NLB.
  2. The request is routed through an Ingress in the Kubernetes cluster.
  3. The Ingress forwards the request directly to the backend service.
  4. Pods of the backend service consist of multiple containers. Each request is routed through an Envoy proxy first.
  5. The Envoy proxy forwards the request to a co-located container running the authorization service.
  6. Pod Identity is used to map an IAM role to a Kubernetes service account bound to the pod, which enables the authorization sidecar to invoke Verified Permissions for an authorization decision. Note that each container in this pod has access to the IAM credentials that are mapped to the service account.
  7. The Envoy proxy awaits the response of the authorization sidecar and blocks or forwards the request to the backend container, depending on the Verified Permissions authorization decision.

When Istio is deployed into a Kubernetes cluster, it introduces Custom Resource Definitions (CRDs) for managing the service mesh. The authorization workflow can be implemented using the ServiceEntry CRD and an Istio Authorization Policy. The authorization service running as a local container in the application pod becomes a registered service entry in the mesh. This service entry can then be configured in an authorization policy as the target for request authorization in the proxy. For more details, see the External Authorization section in the Istio documentation.

Application container

When it comes to integrating Verified Permissions directly within your application container, you have the advantage of fine-grained control over authorization decisions at the application level. This approach allows for more context-aware authorization checks and can be useful when you need to make authorization decisions based on application-specific data that you can query from a policy information point.

Unlike the sidecar pattern, where authorization happens before the request reaches your application code, this approach lets you gather the necessary context from your application state, databases, or other services before making the authorization call. This is particularly valuable when the authorization logic is deeply intertwined with business logic or requires data that’s only available within the application context. This pattern also supports minimizing the number of authorization requests, if, for example, only a subset of requests processed by a monolithic service require authorization.

However, it’s important to note that this tight coupling between authorization and business logic makes the system more brittle and susceptible to breakage when functional or business logic changes occur. This means that modifications to your application code might require careful consideration of their impact on the authorization logic, potentially increasing maintenance complexity.

The architecture for authorization requests from the application container is shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6: Integration of Amazon Verified Permissions in the application container

Figure 6: Integration of Amazon Verified Permissions in the application container

The workflow is as follows:

  1. Authenticated users access the application through an Elastic Load Balancer—either Application Load Balancer (ALB) or NLB depending on workload requirements.
  2. The Kubernetes service or Ingress for the backend application is directly registered at the ALB or NLB by the AWS Load Balancer Controller.
  3. Requests are directly routed to a pod that is backing the service.
  4. The backend application’s logic is responsible for identifying whether a request needs authorization. The backend uses an IAM role injected at runtime through Pod Identity, when an authorization decision from Verified Permission is needed. The backend application returns HTTP status code 403 if the decision is a deny; otherwise it will continue processing the request.

See the Simplify fine-grained authorization with Amazon Verified Permissions and Amazon Cognito blog post for details on calling Verified Permissions within an application.

Choosing the right pattern for your app

You now have a set of patterns to introduce authorization into your containerized workloads. You need to consider multiple factors and understand the trade-offs that come with each pattern to identify the best option for a given scenario. In the following table, we list certain areas with influence on your architectural decisions.

Granularity of authorization decisions
API gateway
  • Authorization on API or service level
  • Decision based on information from HTTP request
  • Suitable for consistent coarse-grained authorization
Ingress controller
  • Authorization on API or service level
  • Decision based on information from HTTP request
  • Suitable for consistent coarse-grained authorization
Sidecar proxy
  • Authorization on service level
  • Decision based on information from HTTP request and service domain (such as policy information point or static service-specific rules)
  • Suitable for service-specific authorization with low or mid-level complexity for decisions
Application container
  • Authorization on code level
  • Decision based on information from HTTP request and arbitrary business logic
  • Suitable for highly complex decision logic
Resource overhead
API gateway
  • No cluster resources needed for authorization
  • Unauthorized requests don’t consume cluster resources
Ingress controller
  • Central Ingress pods consume cluster resources
  • Unauthorized requests don’t consume application pod resources
Sidecar proxy
  • Authorization services increases resource demand of each pod in the cluster
  • Unauthorized requests consume application pod resources
Application container
  • Authorization service consumes resources only when authorization is performed
  • Unauthorized requests consume CPU cycles of application logic until the authorization logic is triggered
Scalability
API gateway
  • Fully managed serverless service
Ingress controller
  • Scaling of Ingress pods needs to be defined
  • Cluster auto-scaling or capacity planning for compute resources in cluster needed
Sidecar proxy
  • Existing scaling policies can be leveraged
Application container
  • Existing scaling policies can be leveraged
Performance
API gateway
  • Invokes Verified Permission in AWS for each request that needs authorization
  • Supports caching to reduce number of requests to Verified Permission out of the box
Ingress controller
  • Invokes Verified Permission in AWS for each request that needs authorization
  • (Optional) Integration of avp-local-agent to minimize number of requests to Verified Permissions
Sidecar proxy
  • Invokes Verified Permissions in AWS for each request that needs authorization
  • (Optional) Integration of avp-local-agent to minimize number of requests to Verified Permissions
Application container
  • Invokes Verified Permissions in AWS only if the business logic processing a request requires authorization
  • (Optional) Integration of avp-local-agent to minimize number of requests to Verified Permissions
Cost
API gateway
  • Consumption-based costs depending on requests received and data transferred out, and optionally cache size
  • Consumption-based costs to invoke Verified Permissions
  • Enabling a cache potentially reduces costs per requests
Ingress controller
  • Adds to infrastructure costs depending on the underlying compute resources needed to run the fleet of pods for Ingress and authorization service
  • Consumption-based costs to invoke Verified Permissions, which can be minimized by integrating avp-local-agent
Sidecar proxy
  • Adds to infrastructure costs depending on the underlying compute resources needed to run the sidecar containers for the proxy and authorization service in each pod
  • Consumption-based costs to invoke Verified Permissions, which can be minimized by integrating avp-local-agent
Application container
  • Typically minimal additional costs, since authorization code shares the application’s resources
  • Consumption-based costs to invoke Verified Permissions, which can be minimized by integrating avp-local-agent
Portability
API gateway
  • Portability is limited and depends on API Gateway with functionality for custom authorization
Ingress controller
  • Portable across Kubernetes environments with Ingress controller supporting external authorization
Sidecar proxy
  • Portable across Kubernetes environments
Application container
  • Highly portable without dependencies to underlying components
Complexity
API gateway
  • Offered as central component by platform engineering team to offload complexity of authorization from product teams
  • Changes in authorization service impact product teams
Ingress controller
  • Offered as central component by platform engineering team to offload complexity of authorization from product teams
  • Changes in authorization service impact product teams
Sidecar proxy
  • Platform engineering teams provide standardized patterns (and optionally implementation) for authorization that can be integrated and implemented by product teams
  • Increases autonomy of individual teams
Application container
  • Full responsibility for authorization lies with the product teams
  • Increases autonomy of individual teams

Not all services have the same requirements for authorization. You can also combine the patterns discussed in this post. You can, for example, put a basic authorization workflow with coarse-grained access control in front of the majority of your services. You can then rely on sidecar proxies with policy information points to inject additional, dynamic context into authorization decisions for specific services. Lastly, if certain use cases of a service demand complex authorization decisions, you can fall back to application-level authorization for specific parts of your code base.

Conclusion

In this blog post, we explored four patterns for integrating Verified Permissions into a containerized environment. We discussed the benefits and considerations of implementing Verified Permissions at different levels: from an API gateway outside of Kubernetes clusters, by means of Ingress controllers and sidecar proxies as network components inside the Kubernetes cluster, to authorization within the application itself. We saw how each pattern offers unique advantages. We also discussed considerations for finding a suitable option for your situation and when to combine patterns.

By using Verified Permissions, organizations can implement consistent, fine-grained authorization across their containerized workloads, whether they’re running on-premises, in the cloud, or in hybrid environments. This centralized approach to authorization can enhance security and simplify policy management and application development.

To learn more about implementing these patterns and best practices, visit the Amazon Verified Permissions User Guide. For hands-on experience, we recommend exploring the Verified Permissions workshop, which provides practical examples and guided exercises.

 
If you have feedback about this post, submit comments in the Comments section below. If you have questions about this post, contact AWS Support.
 

Manuel Heinkel
Manuel Heinkel

Manuel is a Solutions Architect at AWS, working with software companies in Germany to build innovative and secure applications in the cloud. He supports customers in solving business challenges and achieving success with AWS. Manuel has a track record of diving deep into security and SaaS topics. Outside of work, he enjoys spending time with his family and exploring the mountains.
Markus Kokott
Markus Kokott

Markus is a Senior Solutions Architect at AWS, specializing in guiding software companies to become successful SaaS providers. With over a decade of experience in consulting as well as designing, building, and operating software products, he excels in bridging the gap between business and technology. Markus is passionate about containers, platform engineering, and DevOps in general, using his expertise to drive innovation and efficiency.

Best practices for rapidly deploying Landing Zone Accelerator on AWS

Post Syndicated from Lei Shi original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/devops/best-practices-for-rapidly-deploying-landing-zone-accelerator-on-aws/

Landing Zone Accelerator on AWS (LZA) enables customers to deploy a flexible, configuration-driven solution to establish a landing zone while also leveraging AWS Control Tower. At AWS Professional Services, we’ve helped customers deploy and configure LZA hundreds of times. A common request we encounter is integrating LZA configuration into customers’ existing GitOps workflows. GitOps has emerged as a leading model for Infrastructure as Code (IaC), helping organizations automate and manage their cloud infrastructure. The model uses Git repositories as the single source of truth for infrastructure configuration, enabling teams to maintain consistent, version-controlled environments.

In this blog, we will focus on common LZA implementation steps based on our experience, helping customers jump-start their LZA environment and implement GitOps for their AWS infrastructure management. First, we will demonstrate how to leverage LZA while complying with your organization’s policies such as private package repositories. Next, we will guide you through a new installation of LZA that takes advantage of an auto-generated starter set of configuration files. Finally, we will direct you to another blog post that will enable you to leverage GitOps for ongoing management of your LZA configuration.

Architecture overview

The LZA solution leverages two distinct repositories; one for the LZA source code, and another for your organization’s specific configuration files. LZA creates two separate AWS CodePipelines , which are used to install the LZA solution and apply your organization’s specific configuration. Figure 1 illustrates the association between repositories and pipelines. By default, when installing LZA, the solution uses GitHub as the source and pulls the installation files published by AWS from the official LZA GitHub repository.

a diagram with icons illustrating LZA solution components

Figure 1. Landing Zone Accelerator solution components

Deploy LZA as a new install

Step 1: Preparing your enterprise private GitHub to host LZA source code.
Customers may choose to deploy LZA from the official AWS GitHub repository for LZA, but we often we find customers have policies in place that require these types of packages to be deployed from a private repository managed by the organization. For customers using GitHub privately in their enterprise, this can be as easy as cloning the LZA source code repository into your own private GitHub repository, enabling you to take advantage of policies and controls within your organization. Before moving to the next step, take a moment and clone the repository into your own private repository. A GitHub personal access token stored in AWS Secrets Manager is required to enable the stack to access your private repository. Before deploying LZA, follow these instructions to enable stack access to your repository.

Step 2: In the organization management account, install LZA as a CloudFormation Stack.

To get started, we will be going through a new installation of the LZA solution. The following steps provide specific parameter options to the CloudFormation template to support a new installation of LZA.

Specify the following parameters for Source Code Repository Configuration, see Figure 2.

  1. For Stack name, specify a name you like.
  2. For Source Location, choose github.
  3. For Repository Owner, specify your GitHub account owner ID.
  4. For Repository Name, specify your cloned LZA source code repository
  5. For Branch Name, specify the branch name of your LZA source code repository.

a screenshot of a set of parameters setting of LZA source code repo in a cloudformation stack

Figure 2. LZA installer stack parameters – source code repository

Specify the following parameters for Configuration Repository Configuration, see Figure 3.

  1. For Configuration Repository Location, choose s3.
  2. For Use Existing Config Repository, choose No.
  3. For Existing Config Repository Name, Existing Config Repository Branch Name, Existing Config Repository Owner, and Existing Config Repository CodeConnection ARN, leave blank.

We intentionally want to use S3 for the configuration repository because as the LZA solution is installed, it will auto-generate a set of starter configuration YAML files and deploy them for us in S3. This makes it very easy to get started with an initial set of customized YAML files for your environment. We choose “No” in the Use Existing Config Repository field, to have LZA to perform a new LZA installation.

a screenshot of a set of parameters setting of LZA configuration repo in a cloudformation stack

Figure 3. LZA installer stack parameters – configuration repository

  1. Choose Next, and complete the remainder of the stack settings.
  2. Finally, choose Create stack to launch the CloudFormation stack.

The installer stack typically takes minutes to complete (See Figure 4).

a screenshot showing LZA installation cloudformation stack completed successfully

Figure 4. LZA installer stack completion

Step 3: Validate two LZA pipelines are created and successfully completed in AWS CodePipeline console.

After the CloudFormation stack completes, open the AWS CodePipeline console. You’ll see a new pipeline named “AWSAccelerator-Installer” running (See Figure 5). This is the LZA Installer pipeline, and it’s connected to the GitHub source repository you specified in Step 2 above with parameters from 2 to 5. This Installer pipeline automatically generates a set of LZA configuration files stored as a compressed ZIP archive in Amazon S3. It will be designated as configuration repository of the LZA solution.

a screenshot showing LZA installer pipeline created in AWS CodePipeline successfully

Figure 5. AWSAccelerator-Installer pipeline creation

When the AWSAccelerator-Installer pipeline completes, the solution automatically creates and runs a second pipeline named “AWSAccelerator-Pipeline” as shown in Figure 6. This pipeline connects to both the GitHub source repository, and the newly created configuration repository in Amazon S3. The AWSAccelerator-Pipeline is the pipeline that manages your landing zone deployment and customization.

a screenshot showing LZA core pipeline created in AWS CodePipeline successfully

Figure 6. AWSAccelerator-Pipeline created from the AWSAccelerator-Installer pipeline

After the AWSAccelerator-Pipeline completes, your LZA solution is ready for customization.

Step 4: Migrate the LZA configuration repository from S3 to GitHub

With the AWSAccelerator-Pipeline completed, your initial landing zone is now deployed, leveraging the configuration stored in your S3 bucket. For some customers, they may need to ensure that changes to the landing zone configuration are controlled through their existing GitOps processes and tooling. See Figure 7 as an example where the S3 configuration files have been copied to a customer owned GitHub repository. This transition step can be performed in future LZA upgrade window when there is a new release of LZA source code, or right after the initial LZA installation completes in Step 3. For more information on migrating from S3 to GitHub, follow this guide to configure your AWSAccelerator-Pipelines with AWS CodeConnection.

a diagram with icons illustrating LZA solution new components with LZA configuration repo migrated to GitHub

Figure 7. CodeConnection based LZA Configuration Repository

Conclusion

In this post, we explored key steps to streamline your LZA implementation journey. By demonstrating how to work with your private package repositories, providing guidance on leveraging auto-generated configuration files, and introducing GitOps-based management, we’ve outlined a practical path to establish and maintain a robust AWS infrastructure foundation. These approaches can significantly reduce the time and complexity typically associated with LZA deployments while ensuring compliance with organizational policies. We encourage you to try these implementation steps and explore the referenced resources to enhance your AWS cloud operations. For more information about Landing Zone Accelerator, visit the AWS Landing Zone Accelerator on GitHub.

About the authors

author photo of Lei Shi

Lei Shi

Lei Shi is a Delivery Consultant at AWS Professional Services, where he transforms complex cloud challenges into elegant solutions. He focuses on enabling organizations to build secure and scalable cloud environments throughout their AWS journey.

author photo of Adam Spicer

Adam Spicer

Adam Spicer is a Principal Cloud Architect for AWS Professional Services. He works with enterprise customers to design and build their cloud infrastructure and automation to accelerate their migration to AWS. He is an avid FSU Seminole fan who loves to be on outdoor adventures with his family.

Connect your on-premises Kubernetes cluster to AWS APIs using IAM Roles Anywhere

Post Syndicated from Varun Sharma original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/security/connect-your-on-premises-kubernetes-cluster-to-aws-apis-using-iam-roles-anywhere/

Many customers want to seamlessly integrate their on-premises Kubernetes workloads with AWS services, implement hybrid workloads, or migrate to AWS. Previously, a common approach involved creating long-term access keys, which posed security risks and is no longer recommended. While solutions such as Kubernetes secrets vault and third-party options exist, they fail to address the underlying issue effectively.

One option to connect your on-premises Kubernetes workloads to AWS APIs is to use the service account issuer discovery feature. This allows the Kubernetes API server to act as an OpenID Connect (OIDC) identity provider and be federated with AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM). However, this approach requires public internet access to the Kubernetes API server, which might not be desirable for some customers.

To help eliminate the need for long-term access keys or exposing the Kubernetes API server to the public internet, AWS has introduced AWS IAM Roles Anywhere. This feature enables secure, seamless integration of on-premises Kubernetes workloads with AWS services, promoting robust security practices and minimizing potential risks associated with long-term credentials or public exposure.

IAM Roles Anywhere enables workloads outside of AWS to access AWS resources by exchanging X.509 bound identities for temporary AWS credentials. With IAM Roles Anywhere, you can use the same IAM roles and policies as your AWS workloads to access AWS resources, promoting consistency.

IAM Roles Anywhere can be combined with a standard public key infrastructure solution. In this blog post, we use AWS Private Certificate Authority, which has several advantages over using a self-signed certificate authority (CA). First, it reduces operational and management overhead, because AWS manages the CA for you. Second, the cryptographic key material can be stored in hardware security modules or at least vaulted, which helps you protect your private CA against key compromises. Additionally, certificates can be short-lived, which aligns with dynamic Kubernetes environments where pod lifetimes are typically shorter than traditional servers.

We also demonstrate how to integrate IAM Roles Anywhere without modifying your existing workload Docker files, and how to automate the X.509 certificate lifecycle with cert-manager and an AWS Private CA backend in short-lived certificate mode. By using these capabilities, you can seamlessly integrate your on-premises Kubernetes workloads with AWS services, promoting robust security practices, minimizing risks associated with long-term credentials, and helping to ensure a streamlined, consistent access management experience.

This post is for customers who run their own Kubernetes cluster outside of AWS without using Amazon EKS Anywhere. If you’re using Amazon Elastic Kubernetes Service (Amazon EKS), use IAM roles for service accounts or Amazon EKS Pod Identity instead.

Background

“Why should I prefer X.509 certificates over IAM access keys?” Access keys are long-term credentials that must be rotated regularly to minimize the risk of unauthorized access. They need to be securely deployed onto servers hosting applications that use them, requiring procedures for secure transfer and deletion of transient copies. As the number of applications and access keys grows, tracking and managing them becomes operationally challenging.

In contrast, X.509 certificates use public key infrastructure (PKI). The private key is generated directly on the application server and doesn’t leave it. Only a certificate signing request, which doesn’t contain secrets, is sent to the CA for signing and returning the certificate. This alleviates the need for securely transmitting secret keys.

However, you can argue that X.509 certificates are also long-lived credentials. This concern is valid, but not necessarily true. As demonstrated by projects such as Let’s Encrypt, it’s possible to reduce certificate lifetimes from years to months by implementing automation for certificate renewal. After such a mechanism is in place, certificate lifetimes can be further limited to days or even hours.

In this post, we introduce mutually authenticated Transport Layer Security (mTLS), which uses certificates for high-assurance bidirectional authentication. Certificates are used to establish trust between the client and server, making sure that both parties are authenticated and authorized to communicate securely. By implementing mTLS, you can achieve a higher level of security and trust in your communication channels, mitigating potential risks associated with unauthorized access or man-in-the-middle attacks. Here, we implement ephemeral certificates that are tied to the lifecycle of pods. When a pod is started, a certificate is automatically created, and it expires after a short period of time unless it’s actively in use by the pod, in which case it’s automatically renewed by the cert-manager. This approach verifies that certificates are only valid for the duration of the pod’s lifetime, minimizing the potential risk associated with long-lived credentials. Additionally, IAM Roles Anywhere supports certificate revocation list (CRL) checks, allowing you to perform explicit revocation of certificates if required. This feature provides an additional layer of security, enabling you to revoke access promptly in case of compromised credentials or other security concerns.

Throughout this post, we assume that you have a basic understanding of IAM Roles Anywhere. For more information you can see this blog post. Furthermore, we assume that you are familiar with Kubernetes, kubectl, Helm, and cert-manager.

Solution overview

This solution assumes that you have an existing Kubernetes cluster running outside of AWS.

Figure 1 shows the high-level architecture of our solution. An on-premises Kubernetes cluster accessing AWS APIs using IAM Roles Anywhere with X.509 certificates issued by AWS Private CA in short-lived-certificate mode.

Figure 1: High level architecture of on-premises Kubernetes accessing AWS APIs

Figure 1: High level architecture of on-premises Kubernetes accessing AWS APIs

Here’s how the solution works, as shown in Figure 1:

  1. An AWS Private CA in short-lived certificate mode issues X.509 certificates for your pods.
  2. When you set up your AWS Private CA as a trusted source and establish a specific profile, IAM Roles Anywhere will validate and accept authentication requests that use certificates issued by your AWS Private CA.
  3. cert-manager, deployed into your Kubernetes cluster, orchestrates the issuance of AWS Private CA certificates to authorized pods.
  4. Each pod uses IAM Roles Anywhere to create an AWS session using its private key and X.509 certificate obtained from cert-manager.

Let’s explore the different parts of the architecture in more detail.

AWS Private CA short lived credentials

AWS Private CA offers a short-lived certificate, where the validity period is limited to 7 days or fewer. You can see this AWS Blog to learn how to use AWS Private CA short-lived certificates. This new mode can be used to issue certificates for your Kubernetes pods and benefit from lower costs of operations. By synchronizing the certificate lifecycle with the lifecycle of the pod, you can minimize the operational overhead for this solution. To help meet requirements for auditability and transparency, you can use the audit report feature to list the issued certificates in a machine readable format.

IAM Roles Anywhere

Figure 2 shows a detailed overview of the components involved in authentication with IAM Roles Anywhere.

Figure 2: Components of IAM Roles Anywhere

Figure 2: Components of IAM Roles Anywhere

IAM Roles Anywhere allows you to obtain temporary security credentials for workloads that run outside of AWS. Your workloads must use a certificate issued by a trusted PKI CA to authenticate with IAM Roles Anywhere. You establish trust between IAM Roles Anywhere and your CA by creating a trust anchor that points to the root of the CA.

cert-manager

Figure 3 shows a detailed overview of the cert-manager setup used in this post, including the aws-privateca-issuer add-on for the integration of AWS Private CA.

Figure 3: Detailed overview of cert-manager setup

Figure 3: Detailed overview of cert-manager setup

cert-manager is a tool for managing X.509 certificates in Kubernetes. As shown in Figure 3, cert-manager will make sure that certificates are valid and up-to-date and attempt to renew them before they expire. By using add-ons, you can configure different backends for issuing X.509 certificates. In this post, we explore how to integrate cert-manager with AWS Private CA using the aws-privateca-issuer add-on. The aws-privateca-issuer add-on defines two custom resources, AWSPCAIssuer and AWSPCAClusterIssuer, which are used to configure the link to AWS Private CA. They are similar to the Issuer and ClusterIssuer resources that come with cert-manager, but specific to aws-privateca-issuer.

After the AWSPCAIssuer or AWSPCAClusterIssuer is available, aws-privateca-issuer authenticates towards AWS APIs using temporary security credentials obtained from IAM Roles Anywhere. cert-manager watches for the certificate resource, which references to an AWSPCAIssuer, which in turn references to AWS Private CA. aws-privatca-issuer requests a certificate from AWS Private CA. The auto-generated private key and the signed certificate are stored in Kubernetes secrets.

Using certificates and secrets

cert-manager supports multiple ways of integrating into your Kubernetes workloads. You can use certificate resources, which represent a human-readable definition of a certificate signing request (CSR) and contain information on certificate lifespan and renewal time. When using a certificate, the auto-generated private key and the signed certificate are stored in Kubernetes secrets.

With this option, an X.509 certificate is issued manually and saved as a secret. After a PKI is configured as an issuer, a certificate resource is created to automate the renewal of the certificate. With the certificate resource, the lifecycle of certificates is decoupled from the lifecycle of the pods that use them. This allows you to bootstrap the X.509 certificate even before the trusted PKI is deployed.

Using the CSI driver

Another way of integrating cert-manager is by using a CSI driver. In this case, the certificate lifecycle is bound to the lifecycle of the pod. An X.509 certificate and private key are mounted into a predefined folder where your workloads can read them. On pod creation, cert-manager automatically creates a private key and requests a certificate for the configured trusted PKI. When the pod is deleted, the private key and certificate are also deleted and become invalid because they aren’t renewed by cert-manager.

In this post, we use the CSI driver approach for workloads to create ephemeral certificates for IAM Roles Anywhere.

Workload configuration

Figure 4 shows a detailed view of how pods can be configured to use IAM Roles Anywhere without needing to change the underlying Docker images by using a sidecar that provides an IMDSv2 endpoint that mimics the behavior in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) instance metadata endpoint.

Figure 4: Pod configuration using a sidecar

Figure 4: Pod configuration using a sidecar

As shown in Figure 4, when using a certificate resource, the auto-generated private key and the signed certificate are stored in Kubernetes secrets and mounted into the pod. When using the CSI driver, a private key is generated locally (for the pod), a certificate is requested from cert-manager based on the given attributes and is issued by AWSPCAIssuer, and the certificates are mounted directly into the pod with no intermediate secret being created.

IAM Roles Anywhere uses the CreateSession API to authenticate requests with a SigV4a signature using the private key and its associated X.509 certificate. This exchange provides a IAM role session credential, as if you had assumed the IAM role. The aws_signing_helper binary is provided to call the CreateSession API from the command line. In this post, a sidecar container that provides an IMDSv2 endpoint to the workload container is used. This container uses the aws_signing_helper binary and uses its serve command.

This way, applications using AWS SDKs can use the AWS_EC2_METADATA_SERVICE_ENDPOINT environment variable to set the instance metadata endpoint to the correct port on the localhost interface. The X.509 certificate and private key are provided as files to the sidecar container.

Solution deployment

In this section, we show the steps needed to deploy the solution in your AWS account.

Prerequisites

To deploy the solution in this post, make sure that you have the following in place:

  • AWS Command Line Interface (AWS CLI) v2
  • An AWS account and IAM permissions for IAM, IAM Roles Anywhere, and AWS Private CA
  • Latest stable Kubernetes
  • kubectl (matching your Kubernetes version)
  • Helm 3
  • jq

Note: As an alternative to using the AWS CLI, you can use the AWS Controllers for Kubernetes (ACK) service controller for AWS Private CA for creating and managing CertificateAuthority, Certificate, and CertificateAuthorityActivation resources directly within your Kubernetes cluster. After establishing your CA hierarchy using the ACK controller, you can proceed with the subsequent steps involving IAM Roles Anywhere integration, aws-privateca-issuer, and cert-manager as described in this post.

Step 1 – AWS Private CA

  1. Set up a root CA in AWS Private CA, which will issue short lived certificates for your pods. In this example you use only one CA; for production environments, you should check the considerations for designing CA hierarchies. Start by using the AWS CLI to create a configuration.
    cat <<EOF > ca-config.json
    {
       "KeyAlgorithm":"RSA_2048",
       "SigningAlgorithm":"SHA256WITHRSA",
       "Subject":{
          "Country":"DE",
          "Organization":"Example Corp",
          "OrganizationalUnit":"SREs",
          "State":"HE",
          "Locality":"FRANKFURT",
          "CommonName":"Blogpost CA"
       }
    }
    EOF

  2. Create the CA in AWS Private CA with short-lived certificates mode.
    aws acm-pca create-certificate-authority \
      --certificate-authority-configuration file://ca-config.json \
      --certificate-authority-type "ROOT" \
      --usage-mode SHORT_LIVED_CERTIFICATE

  3. The command will return a CertificateAuthorityArn, which you will need for further commands, so export it for later use. Replace <region> with your AWS Region.
    export PCA_ARN=arn:aws:acm-pca:<region>:012345678912:certificate-authority/8213159d-cad0-481c-bf14-a0ced4d6d479

  4. After creating the root CA, the CA is in a pending state. You need to create a CSR.
    aws acm-pca get-certificate-authority-csr \
         --certificate-authority-arn ${PCA_ARN} \
         --output text > ca.csr

  5. Now, the CSR needs to be signed by the root CA.
    aws acm-pca issue-certificate \
         --certificate-authority-arn ${PCA_ARN} \
         --csr fileb://ca.csr \
         --signing-algorithm SHA256WITHRSA \
         --template-arn arn:aws:acm-pca:::template/RootCACertificate/V1 \
         --validity Value=365,Type=DAYS

  6. This command returns a CertificateArn which you will need later. Export it.
    export ROOT_CA_CERTIFICATE_ARN=arn:aws:acm-pca:<region>:012345678912:certificate-authority/8213159d-cad0-481c-bf14-a0ced4d6d479/certificate/5830e475088eee553bd409b7f4964613

  7. Download the root CA certificate and upload it to your AWS Private CA.
    aws acm-pca get-certificate \
        --certificate-authority-arn ${PCA_ARN} \
        --certificate-arn ${ROOT_CA_CERTIFICATE_ARN} \
        --output text > cert.pem
    
    aws acm-pca import-certificate-authority-certificate \
         --certificate-authority-arn ${PCA_ARN} \
         --certificate fileb://cert.pem

  8. Verify the status of the PCA, it should be ACTIVE.
    aws acm-pca describe-certificate-authority \
        --certificate-authority-arn ${PCA_ARN} \
        --output json

Step 2 – IAM Roles Anywhere

At this point your root CA is set up and ready to use. The next step is to configure IAM Roles Anywhere.

  1. Start by defining a trust anchor that will refer to your newly created AWS Private CA and export the trustAnchorArn. Replace <value-of-trustAnchorArn> with the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) value of your IAM Roles Anywhere trust anchor.
    aws rolesanywhere create-trust-anchor \
    --name onprem-k8s-issuer \
    --enabled \
    --source sourceType=AWS_ACM_PCA,sourceData={acmPcaArn=${PCA_ARN}}
    
    export TRUST_ANCHOR_ARN=<value-of-trustAnchorArn>

  2. Create an IAM role to be used by the aws-privateca-issuer cert-manager plugin. This role needs to include the actions sts:AssumeRole, sts:SetSourceIdentity and sts:TagSession, which are required by IAMRA. Replace <TA_ID> with your trust anchor.

    Note: You should specify a PrincipalTag with the CN. Furthermore, it should be scoped to the IAMRA service principal. This further restricts authorization based on attributes that are extracted from the X.509 certificate and provides an additional layer of security by helping to ensure that even if an unauthorized party gains access to a valid certificate, they cannot assume the role unless the certificate’s CN matches the specified value.

    cat <<EOF > trust-policy.json
    {
        "Version": "2012-10-17",
        "Statement": [{
            "Sid": "Statement1",
            "Effect": "Allow",
            "Principal": {
                "Service": "rolesanywhere.amazonaws.com"
            },
            "Action": [
                "sts:AssumeRole",
                "sts:SetSourceIdentity",
                "sts:TagSession"
            ],
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
                    "aws:PrincipalTag/x509Subject/CN": "iamra-issuer"
                },
                "ArnEquals": {
                    "aws:SourceArn": [
                        "arn:aws:rolesanywhere:<region>:012345678912:trust-anchor/<TA_ID>"
                    ]
                }
    
            }
        }]
    }
    EOF

    • Use the following to create the iamra-issuer role:
      aws iam create-role --role-name iamra-issuer \
        --assume-role-policy-document file://trust-policy.json

  3. The command will return a JSON document containing information about the newly created role. Export the ARN for later use.
    export IAMRA_ISSUER_ROLE=arn:aws:iam::012345678912:role/iamra-issuer

  4. Attach an inline policy that allows the role request certificates from your PCA and retrieve these. Note that there is a condition limiting the AWS Private CA templates to only allow EndEntityCertificate.
    cat <<EOF > inline-policy.json
    {
      "Version": "2012-10-17",
      "Statement": [
        {
          "Sid": "awspcaissuerread",
          "Action": [
            "acm-pca:DescribeCertificateAuthority",
            "acm-pca:GetCertificate"
          ],
          "Effect": "Allow",
          "Resource": "$PCA_ARN"
        },
        {
          "Sid": "awspcaissuerwrite",
          "Action": [
            "acm-pca:IssueCertificate"
          ],
          "Effect": "Allow",
          "Resource": "$PCA_ARN",
          "Condition":{
            "StringEquals":{
              "acm-pca:TemplateArn":"arn:aws:acm-pca:::template/EndEntityCertificate/V1"
            }
          }
        }
      ]
    }
    EOF

    • Use the following to associate the inline policy (created in the preceding step) with the iamra-issuer role.
      aws iam put-role-policy --role-name iamra-issuer \
        --policy-name iamra-issuer \
        --policy-document file://inline-policy.json

  5. To finish, create a profile that defines which IAM roles can be assumed and then export the returned ARN.
    aws rolesanywhere create-profile --name iamra-issuer \
      --role-arns ${IAMRA_ISSUER_ROLE} \
      --enabled

    • Export the returned ARN:
      export IAMRA_PROFILE_ARN=arn:aws:rolesanywhere:<region>:012345678912:profile/<Profile_ID>

The created role iamra-issuer will only be used by the aws-privateca-issuer to integrate with AWS Private CA. You should repeat the process of creating IAM roles and IAMRA profiles for your workloads. it’s recommended to create a separate IAM role for each workload and limit its use with condition statements in the trust policy, checking for the workload identity and trust anchor (for example, matching the common name). Furthermore, it’s important that you add IAMRA to the trust policy and allow the aforementioned actions. Best practice with IAM roles is to apply least-privilege permissions.

Step 3 – Create the init container

To integrate IAM Roles Anywhere within your Kubernetes environment, you need to provide an IMDSv2 endpoint to your application containers by running the aws_signing_helper binary as a sidecar. You also need to configure your applications using an environment variable to use the new instance metadata endpoint. To do so, build a Docker image that works as a sidecar.

In this step, create a basic image that fulfills the preceding requirements. In your environment, you might want to adapt this example to use your own base image and implement your image hardening processes.

Copy the following script and save it as init.sh.

#!/bin/sh

if [[ -z "$TRUST_ANCHOR_ARN" ]]; then
  echo "Must provide TRUST_ANCHOR_ARN environment variable." 1>&2
  exit 1
fi

if [[ -z "$PROFILE_ARN" ]]; then
  echo "Must provide PROFILE_ARN environment variable." 1>&2
  exit 1
fi

if [[ -z "$ROLE_ARN" ]]; then
  echo "Must provide ROLE_ARN environment variable." 1>&2
  exit 1
fi

echo "starting IMDSv2 endpoint with aws_signing_helper ..."
/aws_signing_helper serve \
  --certificate /iamra/tls.crt         \
  --private-key /iamra/tls.key         \
  --trust-anchor-arn $TRUST_ANCHOR_ARN \
  --profile-arn $PROFILE_ARN           \
  --role-arn $ROLE_ARN

This script is the entry point of the sidecar container. It expects the environment variables TRUST_ANCHOR_ARN, PROFILE_ARN, and ROLE_ARN, which are required by aws_signing_helper. It also expects an X.509 certificate and its private key in the folder /iamra, which will be mounted in a later stage during pod initialization. Finally, it invokes the aws_signing_helper with the serve directive which creates an IMDSv2 endpoint listening on 9911 by default. This can be customized using the --port parameter.

Now let’s inspect the Docker file.

Note: At the time of writing, we used the alpine3.17.0 image. Use a hardened base image that’s designed to be secure and aligns with the requirements of your environment.

FROM alpine:3.17.0

COPY init.sh .
RUN apk add --no-cache libc6-compat libgcc wget
RUN wget https://rolesanywhere.amazonaws.com/releases/1.3.0/X86_64/Linux/aws_signing_helper
RUN chmod +x /aws_signing_helper /init.sh 
RUN ln -s /lib/libc.musl-x86_64.so.1 /lib/libresolv.so.2
ENTRYPOINT ["/bin/sh", "-c", "/init.sh"]

This Docker file copies the init.sh and downloads the aws_signing_helper binary. The init.sh script is defined as an entry point to the container. Dynamic libraries required by aws_signing_helper are installed using Alpine Linux package manager (Apk).

Now build the docker image, sign in to it, and push it for later use. For the following commands replace <my-docker-registry> with the hostname of your local registry or use an ECR Repository.

docker build . -t <my-docker-registry>/iamra-sidecar
docker login <my-docker-registry>
docker push <my-docker-registry>/iamra-sidecar

Step 4 – Install cert-manager

In this step, install cert-manager into your cluster and configure aws-privateca-issuer using a manually bootstrapped certificate. cert-manager-approver-policy is used to control which certificates can be requested by the workloads. Then, set up the cert-manager CSI driver to automatically provision X.509 certificates for your workload pods.

Start with the cert-manager setup:

  1. Add the cert-manager repository to Helm and install the chart.

    Note: At the time of writing, we used cert-manager version 1.16.2. Check for the latest stable version.

    helm repo add jetstack https://charts.jetstack.io
    helm repo update
    helm install \
      cert-manager jetstack/cert-manager \
      --namespace cert-manager \
      --create-namespace \
      --version v1.16.2 \
      --set installCRDs=true \
      --set extraArgs={--controllers='*\,-certificaterequests-approver'}
      
    helm install \
      cert-manager-approver-policy jetstack/cert-manager-approver-policy \
      --namespace cert-manager \
      --wait \
        --set app.approveSignerNames="{\
    issuers.cert-manager.io/*,clusterissuers.cert-manager.io/*,\
    awspcaclusterissuers.awspca.cert-manager.io/*,awspcaissuers.awspca.cert-manager.io/*\
    }"
    
    
    #make modifications in cert-manager-approver-policy and add below permissions
    
    kubectl edit  Clusterrole cert-manager-approver-policy -n cert-manager -o yaml
    
    - apiGroups:
      - awspca.cert-manager.io
      resources:
      - awspcaissuers
      - awspcaclusterissuers
      verbs:
      - get
      - list
      - watch
    - apiGroups:
      - cert-manager.io
      - awspca.cert-manager.io
      resources:
      - signers
      verbs:
      - approve

    Now, install the cert-manager aws-privateca-issuer plugin. This integration connects cert-manager with AWS Private CA and lets you issue short-lived certificates automatically. Currently, aws-privateca-issuer Helm chart doesn’t support IAMRA natively. So, you’re going to use the same init-container to set up IAMRA as for the workload pods.

    You need to issue the first X.509 certificate for aws-privateca-issuer IAMRA manually. Later, cert-manager will renew it automatically.

  2. Create the bootstrap certificate. When asked for a common name, enter iamra-issuer.
    openssl req -out iamra.csr -new -newkey rsa:2048 \
    -nodes -keyout iamra.key
    

    The previous command will create an RSA private key named iamra.key and a certificate signing request name iamra.csr. Now you need to call AWS Private CA to issue the bootstrap certificate.

  3. Set the validity period of the certificate to 1 day so that cert-manager will replace it after it’s set up. The IAM role that’s performing this action must have permissions to AWS Certificate Manager (ACM), IAM, and IAM Roles Anywhere to complete the setup.
    aws acm-pca issue-certificate \
          --certificate-authority-arn ${PCA_ARN} \
          --csr fileb://iamra.csr \
          --signing-algorithm "SHA256WITHRSA" \
          --validity Value=1,Type="DAYS"

  4. The command will return a CertificateArn for your iamra-issuer certificate. Export it and save the certificate to a file.
    export IAMRA_ISSUER_CERT_ARN=arn:aws:acm-pca:<region>:012345678912:certificate-authority/8213159d-cad0-481c-bf14-a0ced4d6d479/certificate/afc47911ed2ded9c2664fa597a33b9fb
    aws acm-pca get-certificate \
          --certificate-authority-arn ${PCA_ARN} \
          --certificate-arn ${IAMRA_ISSUER_CERT_ARN} | \
          jq -r .'Certificate' > iamra-cert.pem

  5. Create a Kubernetes secret that contains the certificate and private key.
    kubectl create secret tls -n cert-manager iamra-issuer \
      --cert=iamra-cert.pem \
      --key=iamra.key

    You’re ready to install the aws-privateca-issuer. You need to modify the Helm chart because it doesn’t currently support IAMRA. You will render the Helm chart into YAML manifests, which are then adapted for IAMRA.

  6. Install the Helm repository and render the charts into a file.
    helm repo add awspca https://cert-manager.github.io/aws-privateca-issuer
     helm template --release-name iamra --include-crds awspca/aws-privateca-issuer \
       -n cert-manager > privateca-issuer.yaml

  7. Add your previously built image as a sidecar and replace the environment variables with your exported values. Search for the deployment definition and add the following section:
    # Source: aws-privateca-issuer/templates/deployment.yaml
    apiVersion: apps/v1
    kind: Deployment
    metadata:
      name: iamra-aws-privateca-issuer
      namespace: cert-manager
      labels:
        helm.sh/chart: aws-privateca-issuer-v1.4.0
        app.kubernetes.io/name: aws-privateca-issuer
        app.kubernetes.io/instance: iamra
        app.kubernetes.io/version: "v1.4.0"
        app.kubernetes.io/managed-by: Helm
    spec:
      replicas: 1
      revisionHistoryLimit: 10
      selector:
        matchLabels:
          app.kubernetes.io/name: aws-privateca-issuer
          app.kubernetes.io/instance: iamra
      template:
        metadata:
          labels:
            app.kubernetes.io/name: aws-privateca-issuer
            app.kubernetes.io/instance: iamra
        spec:
          serviceAccountName: iamra-aws-privateca-issuer
          securityContext:
            runAsUser: 65532
          volumes:
            - name: "iamra-secret"
              projected:
                sources:
                  - secret:
                      name: iamra-issuer
          containers:
            - name: iamra-sidecar
              image: 012345678912.dkr.ecr.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/<replace-with-iamra-sidecar-repository>
              imagePullPolicy: Always
              env:
                - name: "TRUST_ANCHOR_ARN"
                  value: "arn:aws:rolesanywhere:us-east-2:012345678912:trust-anchor/05d183f8-a34e-4f0c-ad2a-de6f803"
                - name: "PROFILE_ARN"
                  value: "arn:aws:rolesanywhere:us-east-2:012345678912:profile/7b45f9a9-73fa-47f8-a20f-88aacbf57"
                - name: "ROLE_ARN"
                  value: "arn:aws:iam::012345678912:role/iamra-issuer"
              volumeMounts:
                - name: iamra-secret
                  mountPath: "/iamra"
                  readOnly: true
            - name: aws-privateca-issuer
              securityContext:
                allowPrivilegeEscalation: false
              image: "public.ecr.aws/k1n1h4h4/cert-manager-aws-privateca-issuer:latest"
              env:
               - name: "AWS_EC2_METADATA_SERVICE_ENDPOINT"
                 value: "http://localhost:9911/"
              imagePullPolicy: IfNotPresent
              command:
                - /manager
              args:
                - --leader-elect
              ports:
                - containerPort: 8080
                  name: http
              livenessProbe:
                httpGet:
                  path: /healthz
                  port: 8081
                initialDelaySeconds: 15
                periodSeconds: 20
              readinessProbe:
                httpGet:
                  path: /healthz
                  port: 8081
                initialDelaySeconds: 5
                periodSeconds: 10
          terminationGracePeriodSeconds: 10

  8. Apply your modified manifest to install aws-privateca-issuer and verify the deployment you have modified. It should show that one pod is ready and available.
    kubectl apply -f privateca-issuer.yaml
    
    kubectl get deployment -n cert-manager -l app.kubernetes.io/name=aws-privateca-issuer
    
    NAME                         READY   UP-TO-DATE   AVAILABLE   AGE
    iamra-aws-privateca-issuer   1/1     1            1           4d10h

  9. Define an AWSPCAIssuer, which will be used for renewal of the manually bootstrapped certificate for the aws-privateca-issuer add-on.

    Note: At the time of writing, we used awspca cert-manager API version v1beta1. Check for the latest stable version.

    export AWS_REGION=<region>
    cat <<EOF | kubectl apply -f -
    apiVersion: awspca.cert-manager.io/v1beta1
    kind: AWSPCAIssuer
    metadata:
      name: iamra-cm-issuer
      namespace: cert-manager
    spec:
      arn: ${PCA_ARN}
      region: ${AWS_REGION}
    EOF

  10. After at least one AWSPCAIssuer or AWSPCAClusterIssuer is available, aws-privateca-issuer is going to authenticate towards AWS APIs by calling sts.get-caller-identity and verify the authentication method. You can verify this using its log files. It should print the assumed role.
    kubectl logs -n cert-manager -l app.kubernetes.io/name=aws-privateca-issuer -c aws-privateca-issuer | grep -i getcalleridentity
    
    Defaulted container "aws-privateca-issuer" out of: aws-privateca-issuer, iamra-init (init)
    {"level":"info","ts":1669240040.2704494,"logger":"controllers.GenericIssuer","msg":"sts.GetCallerIdentity","genericissuer":"cert-manager/iamra-cm-issuer","arn":"arn:aws:sts::012345678912:assumed-role/iamra-issuer/5bafffcfb691969f0616a9b1a68032ec","account":"012345678912","user_id":"AROA2EIPPI5BVJ6SKBYOY:5bafffcfb691969f0616a9b1a68032ec"}

    Now, you can create a cert-manager Certificate resource that represents a desired certificate that should be issued by the referenced cert-manager Issuer. It combines information of a CSR with details on the validity period and renewal.

  11. Create the certificate object:
    cat <<EOF | kubectl apply -f - 
      apiVersion: cert-manager.io/v1
      kind: Certificate
      metadata:
        name: iamra-privateca-issuer-cert
        namespace: cert-manager
      spec:
        secretName: iamra-issuer
        duration: 168h # 7d
        renewBefore: 24h # 15d
        subject:
          organizations:
            - "Example Corp."
          organizationalUnits:
            - "Admin"
        commonName: "iamra-issuer"
        isCA: false
        usages:
          - "client auth"
          - "server auth"
        issuerRef:
          group: awspca.cert-manager.io
          kind: AWSPCAIssuer
          name: iamra-cm-issuer
      EOF
      helm upgrade -i -n cert-manager cert-manager-csi-driver jetstack/cert-manager-csi-driver --wait
      -- > install policies:
      policy + role + role binding to allow service account to accept certs.
      cat <<EOF | kubectl apply -f - 
      apiVersion: policy.cert-manager.io/v1alpha1
      kind: CertificateRequestPolicy
      metadata:
        name: iamra-issuer-policy
      spec:
        allowed:
          commonName:
            required: true
            value: "iamra-issuer"
          subject:
            organizations:
              values: ["Example Corp."]
              required: true
            organizationalUnits:
              values: ["Admin"]
              required: true
          usages:
          - "server auth"
          - "client auth"
        selector:
          issuerRef:
            group: awspca.cert-manager.io
            kind: AWSPCAIssuer
            name: iamra-cm-issuer
      ---
      apiVersion: rbac.authorization.k8s.io/v1
      kind: ClusterRole
      metadata:
        name: cert-manager-policy:iamra-issuer-policy
      rules:
        - apiGroups: ["policy.cert-manager.io"]
          resources: ["certificaterequestpolicies"]
          verbs: ["use"]
          resourceNames: ["iamra-issuer-policy"]
      ---
      apiVersion: rbac.authorization.k8s.io/v1
      kind: ClusterRoleBinding
      metadata:
        name: cert-manager-policy:iamra-issuer-policy
      roleRef:
        apiGroup: rbac.authorization.k8s.io
        kind: ClusterRole
        name: cert-manager-policy:iamra-issuer-policy
      subjects:
      - kind: ServiceAccount
        name: cert-manager
        namespace: cert-manager
      EOF

Step 5 – Deploy your workload

In Step 4, sub-step 9, you created an AWSPCAIssuer named iamra-cm-issuer. You then used this AWSPCAIssuer to renew the manually bootstrapped certificate for the aws-privateca-issuer.

In Step 4, sub-step 11, you created the certificate iamra-privateca-issuer-cert, which is used by the aws-privateca-issuer.

In this step, you will deploy the sample workload. When deploying the sample workload, make sure to repeat the process of creating IAM roles and IAMRA profiles (from Step 2), the AWSPCAIssuer (Step 4, sub-step 9), and the CertificateRequestPolicy (Step 4, sub-step 11) for the certificate request.

For more information on certificate request policies, see the cert-manager documentation on approval policies.

Use the following code to deploy the workload.

cat <<EOF | kubectl apply -f -
  
apiVersion: v1
kind: Pod
metadata:
   creationTimestamp: null
   labels:
     run: acmpca-csi-test
   name: acmpca-csi-test
spec:
  containers:
      - name: iamra-sidecar
        image: 056930860237.dkr.ecr.us-east-2.amazonaws.com/aws_sighning:latest
        imagePullPolicy: Always
        env:
          - name: "TRUST_ANCHOR_ARN"
            value: "arn:aws:rolesanywhere:us-east-2:012345678912:trust-anchor/05d183f8-a34e-4f0c-ad2a-de6f803ac172"
          - name: "PROFILE_ARN"
            value: "arn:aws:rolesanywhere:us-east-2:012345678912:profile/7b45f9a9-73fa-47f8-a20f-88aacbf579d2"
          - name: "ROLE_ARN"
            value: "arn:aws:iam::012345678912:role/iam-roles-anywhere-s3-full-access"
        volumeMounts:
          - name: "iamra-csi"
            mountPath: "/iamra"
            readOnly: true
      - name: aws-cli
        image: amazon/aws-cli:latest
        env:
        - name: "AWS_EC2_METADATA_SERVICE_ENDPOINT"
          value: "http://127.0.0.1:9911/"
        command:
          - sleep
          - "3600"
  dnsPolicy: ClusterFirst
  restartPolicy: Never
  volumes:
    - name: "iamra-csi"
      csi:
        readOnly: true
        driver: csi.cert-manager.io
        volumeAttributes:
            csi.cert-manager.io/issuer-name: my-pca
            csi.cert-manager.io/issuer-group: awspca.cert-manager.io
            csi.cert-manager.io/issuer-kind: AWSPCAIssuer
            csi.cert-manager.io/common-name: "${SERVICE_ACCOUNT_NAME}.${POD_NAMESPACE}"
            csi.cert-manager.io/duration: 168h
            csi.cert-manager.io/renew-before: 24h
            csi.cert-manager.io/is-ca: "false"
            csi.cert-manager.io/key-usages: "client auth, server auth"
  EOF

Step 6 – Test your deployment

To test the deployment, you can use kubectl exec to access the iamra-sidecar container. Navigate to the iamra directory and check if the certificate and key are mounted.

Command:
kubectl exec -it acmpca-csi-test  – sh
ls | grep iamra

Output: iamra

Command:
cd iamra
/iamra# ls

Output: ca.crt   tls.crt  tls.key

You can also exec into the aws-cli container and verify the caller identity and make API calls to Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3):

Command:
kubectl exec -it acmpca-csi-test -c aws-cli  – sh
$aws sts get-caller-identity

Output: You should see iam-roles-anywhere-s3-full-access in caller-identity.

Command:
$aws s3 ls

Output: You should be able to list the S3 bucket based on the permissions associated with the assumed role.

Summary

In this post, you learned about a solution for securely connecting on-premises Kubernetes workloads to AWS services using IAM Roles Anywhere. The approach alleviates the need for long-term access keys or public internet exposure of the Kubernetes API server. By using this solution for containerized and full stack applications, you can benefit from:

  • Enhanced security: Use short-lived X.509 certificates instead of long-term credentials.
  • Simplified management: Automate the certificate lifecycle with cert-manager and AWS Private CA.
  • Seamless integration: No modifications are required to existing workload Docker files.
  • Consistent policies: Use the same IAM roles and policies across AWS and on premises.

 
If you have feedback about this post, submit comments in the Comments section below. If you have questions about this post, contact AWS Support.
 

Varun Sharma
Varun Sharma

Varun is a Senior AWS Cloud Security Engineer who wears his security cape proudly. Varun is a go-to subject matter expert for Amazon Cognito and IAM. When he’s not busy securing the cloud, you’ll find him in the world of security penetration testing. Outside of work, Varun switches gears to capture the beauty of nature through the lens of his camera.
Nishant Mainro
Nishant Mainro

Nishant is a Senior Security Consultant in the AWS Professional Services team and is based in Atlanta, Georgia. He is a technical and passionate Amazonian with over 16 years of professional experience with a specialization in security, risk, and compliance. His specializes developing and enabling security controls at scale to empower customers to achieve the required security goals for their workloads.
Roshini Jagarapu
Roshini Jagarapu

Roshini is an Amazon EKS subject matter expert and an AWS Cloud Support Engineer based in India. She works with services such as Amazon EKS and Amazon ECS, helping customers run at scale. Her day-to-day work involves troubleshooting issues related to container technologies. Roshini conducts learning sessions to educate customers and is passionate about cloud-native solutions.

Migrate from Standard brokers to Express brokers in Amazon MSK using Amazon MSK Replicator

Post Syndicated from Subham Rakshit original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/big-data/migrate-from-standard-brokers-to-express-brokers-in-amazon-msk-using-amazon-msk-replicator/

Amazon Managed Streaming for Apache Kafka (Amazon MSK) now offers a new broker type called Express brokers. It’s designed to deliver up to 3 times more throughput per broker, scale up to 20 times faster, and reduce recovery time by 90% compared to Standard brokers running Apache Kafka. Express brokers come preconfigured with Kafka best practices by default, support Kafka APIs, and provide the same low latency performance that Amazon MSK customers expect, so you can continue using existing client applications without any changes. Express brokers provide straightforward operations with hands-free storage management by offering unlimited storage without pre-provisioning, eliminating disk-related bottlenecks. To learn more about Express brokers, refer to Introducing Express brokers for Amazon MSK to deliver high throughput and faster scaling for your Kafka clusters.

Creating a new cluster with Express brokers is straightforward, as described in Amazon MSK Express brokers. However, if you have an existing MSK cluster, you need to migrate to a new Express based cluster. In this post, we discuss how you should plan and perform the migration to Express brokers for your existing MSK workloads on Standard brokers. Express brokers offer a different user experience and a different shared responsibility boundary, so using them on an existing cluster is not possible. However, you can use Amazon MSK Replicator to copy all data and metadata from your existing MSK cluster to a new cluster comprising of Express brokers.

MSK Replicator offers a built-in replication capability to seamlessly replicate data from one cluster to another. It automatically scales the underlying resources, so you can replicate data on demand without having to monitor or scale capacity. MSK Replicator also replicates Kafka metadata, including topic configurations, access control lists (ACLs), and consumer group offsets.

In the following sections, we discuss how to use MSK Replicator to replicate the data from a Standard broker MSK cluster to an Express broker MSK cluster and the steps involved in migrating the client applications from the old cluster to the new cluster.

Planning your migration

Migrating from Standard brokers to Express brokers requires thorough planning and careful consideration of various factors. In this section, we discuss key aspects to address during the planning phase.

Assessing the source cluster’s infrastructure and needs

It’s crucial to evaluate the capacity and health of the current (source) cluster to make sure it can handle additional consumption during migration, because MSK Replicator will retrieve data from the source cluster. Key checks include:

    • CPU utilization – The combined CPU User and CPU System utilization per broker should remain below 60%.
    • Network throughput – The cluster-to-cluster replication process adds extra egress traffic, because it might need to replicate the existing data based on business requirements along with the incoming data. For instance, if the ingress volume is X GB/day and data is retained in the cluster for 2 days, replicating the data from the earliest offset would cause the total egress volume for replication to be 2X GB. The cluster must accommodate this increased egress volume.

Let’s take an example where in your existing source cluster you have an average data ingress of 100 MBps and peak data ingress of 400 MBps with retention of 48 hours. Let’s assume you have one consumer of the data you produce to your Kafka cluster, which means that your egress traffic will be same compared to your ingress traffic. Based on this requirement, you can use the Amazon MSK sizing guide to calculate the broker capacity you need to safely handle this workload. In the spreadsheet, you will need to provide your average and maximum ingress/egress traffic in the cells, as shown in the following screenshot.

Because you need to replicate all the data produced in your Kafka cluster, the consumption will be higher than the regular workload. Taking this into account, your overall egress traffic will be at least twice the size of your ingress traffic.
However, when you run a replication tool, the resulting egress traffic will be higher than twice the ingress because you also need to replicate the existing data along with the new incoming data in the cluster. In the preceding example, you have an average ingress of 100 MBps and you retain data for 48 hours, which means that you have a total of approximately 18 TB of existing data in your source cluster that needs to be copied over on top of the new data that’s coming through. Let’s further assume that your goal for the replicator is to catch up in 30 hours. In this case, your replicator needs to copy data at 260 MBps (100 MBps for ingress traffic + 160 MBps (18 TB/30 hours) for existing data) to catch up in 30 hours. The following figure illustrates this process.

Therefore, in the sizing guide’s egress cells, you need to add an additional 260 MBps to your average data out and peak data out to estimate the size of the cluster you should provision to complete the replication safely and on time.

Replication tools act as a consumer to the source cluster, so there is a chance that this replication consumer can consume higher bandwidth, which can negatively impact the existing application client’s produce and consume requests. To control the replication consumer throughput, you can use a consumer-side Kafka quota in the source cluster to limit the replicator throughput. This makes sure that the replicator consumer will throttle when it goes beyond the limit, thereby safeguarding the other consumers. However, if the quota is set too low, the replication throughput will suffer and the replication might never end. Based on the preceding example, you can set a quota for the replicator to be at least 260 MBps, otherwise the replication will not finish in 30 hours.

  • Volume throughput – Data replication might involve reading from the earliest offset (based on business requirement), impacting your primary storage volume, which in this case is Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS). The VolumeReadBytes and VolumeWriteBytes metrics should be checked to make sure the source cluster volume throughput has additional bandwidth to handle any additional read from the disk. Depending on the cluster size and replication data volume, you should provision storage throughput in the cluster. With provisioned storage throughput, you can increase the Amazon EBS throughput up to 1000 MBps depending on the broker size. The maximum volume throughput can be specified depending on broker size and type, as mentioned in Manage storage throughput for Standard brokers in a Amazon MSK cluster. Based on the preceding example, the replicator will start reading from the disk and the volume throughput of 260 MBps will be shared across all the brokers. However, existing consumers can lag, which will cause reading from the disk, thereby increasing the storage read throughput. Also, there is storage write throughput due to incoming data from the producer. In this scenario, enabling provisioned storage throughput will increase the overall EBS volume throughput (read + write) so that existing producer and consumer performance doesn’t get impacted due to the replicator reading data from EBS volumes.
  • Balanced partitions – Make sure partitions are well-distributed across brokers, with no skewed leader partitions.

Depending on the assessment, you might need to vertically scale up or horizontally scale out the source cluster before migration.

Assessing the target cluster’s infrastructure and needs

Use the same sizing tool to estimate the size of your Express broker cluster. Typically, fewer Express brokers might be needed compared to Standard brokers for the same workload because depending on the instance size, Express brokers allow up to three times more ingress throughput.

Configuring Express Brokers

Express brokers employ opinionated and optimized Kafka configurations, so it’s important to differentiate between configurations that are read-only and those that are read/write during planning. Read/write broker-level configurations should be configured separately as a pre-migration step in the target cluster. Although MSK Replicator will replicate most topic-level configurations, certain topic-level configurations are always set to default values in an Express cluster: replication-factor, min.insync.replicas, and unclean.leader.election.enable. If the default values differ from the source cluster, these configurations will be overridden.

As part of the metadata, MSK Replicator also copies certain ACL types, as mentioned in Metadata replication. It doesn’t explicitly copy the write ACLs except the deny ones. Therefore, if you’re using SASL/SCRAM or mTLS authentication with ACLs rather than AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) authentication, write ACLs need to be explicitly created in the target cluster.

Client connectivity to the target cluster

Deployment of the target cluster can occur within the same virtual private cloud (VPC) or a different one. Consider any changes to client connectivity, including updates to security groups and IAM policies, during the planning phase.

Migration strategy: All at once vs. wave

Two migration strategies can be adopted:

  • All at once – All topics are replicated to the target cluster simultaneously, and all clients are migrated at once. Although this approach simplifies the process, it generates significant egress traffic and involves risks to multiple clients if issues arise. However, if there is any failure, you can roll back by redirecting the clients to use the source cluster. It’s recommended to perform the cutover during non-business hours and communicate with stakeholders beforehand.
  • Wave – Migration is broken into phases, moving a subset of clients (based on business requirements) in each wave. After each phase, the target cluster’s performance can be evaluated before proceeding. This reduces risks and builds confidence in the migration but requires meticulous planning, especially for large clusters with many microservices.

Each strategy has its pros and cons. Choose the one that aligns best with your business needs. For insights, refer to Goldman Sachs’ migration strategy to move from on-premises Kafka to Amazon MSK.

Cutover plan

Although MSK Replicator facilitates seamless data replication with minimal downtime, it’s essential to devise a clear cutover plan. This includes coordinating with stakeholders, stopping producers and consumers in the source cluster, and restarting them in the target cluster. If a failure occurs, you can roll back by redirecting the clients to use the source cluster.

Schema registry

When migrating from a Standard broker to an Express broker cluster, schema registry considerations remain unaffected. Clients can continue using existing schemas for both producing and consuming data with Amazon MSK.

Solution overview

In this setup, two Amazon MSK provisioned clusters are deployed: one with Standard brokers (source) and the other with Express brokers (target). Both clusters are located in the same AWS Region and VPC, with IAM authentication enabled. MSK Replicator is used to replicate topics, data, and configurations from the source cluster to the target cluster. The replicator is configured to maintain identical topic names across both clusters, providing seamless replication without requiring client-side changes.

During the first phase, the source MSK cluster handles client requests. Producers write to the clickstream topic in the source cluster, and a consumer group with the group ID clickstream-consumer reads from the same topic. The following diagram illustrates this architecture.

When data replication to the target MSK cluster is complete, we need to evaluate the health of the target cluster. After confirming the cluster is healthy, we need to migrate the clients in a controlled manner. First, we need to stop the producers, reconfigure them to write to the target cluster, and then restart them. Then, we need to stop the consumers after they have processed all remaining records in the source cluster, reconfigure them to read from the target cluster, and restart them. The following diagram illustrates the new architecture.

After verifying that all clients are functioning correctly with the target cluster using Express brokers, we can safely decommission the source MSK cluster with Standard brokers and the MSK Replicator.

Deployment Steps

In this section, we discuss the step-by-step process to replicate data from an MSK Standard broker cluster to an Express broker cluster using MSK Replicator and also the client migration strategy. For the purpose of the blog, “all at once” migration strategy is used.

Provision the MSK cluster

Download the AWS CloudFormation template to provision the MSK cluster. Deploy the following in us-east-1 with stack name as migration.

This will create the VPC, subnets, and two Amazon MSK provisioned clusters: one with Standard brokers (source) and another with Express brokers (target) within the VPC configured with IAM authentication. It will also create a Kafka client Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) instance where from we can use the Kafka command line to create and view Kafka topics and produce and consume messages to and from the topic.

Configure the MSK client

On the Amazon EC2 console, connect to the EC2 instance named migration-KafkaClientInstance1 using Session Manager, a capability of AWS Systems Manager.

After you log in, you need to configure the source MSK cluster bootstrap address to create a topic and publish data to the cluster. You can get the bootstrap address for IAM authentication from the details page for the MSK cluster (migration-standard-broker-src-cluster) on the Amazon MSK console, under View Client Information. You also need to update the producer.properties and consumer.properties files to reflect the bootstrap address of the standard broker cluster.

sudo su - ec2-user

export BS_SRC=<<SOURCE_MSK_BOOTSTRAP_ADDRESS>>
sed -i "s/BOOTSTRAP_SERVERS_CONFIG=/BOOTSTRAP_SERVERS_CONFIG=${BS_SRC}/g" producer.properties 
sed -i "s/bootstrap.servers=/bootstrap.servers=${BS_SRC}/g" consumer.properties

Create a topic

Create a clickstream topic using the following commands:

/home/ec2-user/kafka/bin/kafka-topics.sh --bootstrap-server=$BS_SRC \
--create --replication-factor 3 --partitions 3 \
--topic clickstream \
--command-config=/home/ec2-user/kafka/config/client_iam.properties

Produce and consume messages to and from the topic

Run the clickstream producer to generate events in the clickstream topic:

cd /home/ec2-user/clickstream-producer-for-apache-kafka/

java -jar target/KafkaClickstreamClient-1.0-SNAPSHOT.jar -t clickstream \
-pfp /home/ec2-user/producer.properties -nt 8 -rf 3600 -iam \
-gsr -gsrr <<REGION>> -grn default-registry -gar

Open another Session Manager instance and from that shell, run the clickstream consumer to consume from the topic:

cd /home/ec2-user/clickstream-consumer-for-apache-kafka/

java -jar target/KafkaClickstreamConsumer-1.0-SNAPSHOT.jar -t clickstream \
-pfp /home/ec2-user/consumer.properties -nt 3 -rf 3600 -iam \
-gsr -gsrr <<REGION>> -grn default-registry

Keep the producer and consumer running. If not interrupted, the producer and consumer will run for 60 minutes before it exits. The -rf parameter controls how long the producer and consumer will run.

Create an MSK replicator

To create an MSK replicator, complete the following steps:

  1. On the Amazon MSK console, choose Replicators in the navigation pane.
  2. Choose Create replicator.
  3. In the Replicator details section, enter a name and optional description.

  1. In the Source cluster section, provide the following information:
    1. For Cluster region, choose us-east-1.
    2. For MSK cluster, enter the MSK cluster Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the Standard broker.

After the source cluster is selected, it automatically selects the subnets associated with the primary cluster and the security group associated with the source cluster. You can also select additional security groups.

Make sure that the security groups have outbound rules to allow traffic to your cluster’s security groups. Also make sure that your cluster’s security groups have inbound rules that accept traffic from the replicator security groups provided here.

  1. In the Target cluster section, for MSK cluster¸ enter the MSK cluster ARN for the Express broker.

After the target cluster is selected, it automatically selects the subnets associated with the primary cluster and the security group associated with the source cluster. You can also select additional security groups.

Now let’s provide the replicator settings.

  1. In the Replicator settings section, provide the following information:
    1. For the purpose of the example, we have kept the topics to replicate as a default value that would replicate all topics from primary to secondary cluster.
    2. For Replicator starting position, we configure it to replicate from the earliest offset, so that we can get all the events from the start of the source topics.
    3. To configure the topic name in the secondary cluster as identical to the primary cluster, we select Keep the same topic names for Copy settings. This makes sure that the MSK clients don’t need to add a prefix to the topic names.

    1. For this example, we keep the Consumer Group Replication setting as default (make sure it’s enabled to allow redirected clients resume processing data from the last processed offset).
    2. We set Target Compression type as None.

The Amazon MSK console will automatically create the required IAM policies. If you’re deploying using the AWS Command Line Interface (AWS CLI), SDK, or AWS CloudFormation, you have to create the IAM policy and use it as per your deployment process.

  1. Choose Create to create the replicator.

The process will take around 15–20 minutes to deploy the replicator. When the MSK replicator is running, this will be reflected in the status.

Monitor replication

When the MSK replicator is up and running, monitor the MessageLag metric. This metric indicates how many messages are yet to be replicated from the source MSK cluster to the target MSK cluster. The MessageLag metric should come down to 0.

Migrate clients from source to target cluster

When the MessageLag metric reaches 0, it indicates that all messages have been replicated from the source MSK cluster to the target MSK cluster. At this stage, you can cut over client applications from the source to the target cluster. Before initiating this step, confirm the health of the target cluster by reviewing the Amazon MSK metrics in Amazon CloudWatch and making sure that the client applications are functioning properly. Then complete the following steps:

  1. Stop the producers writing data to the source (old) cluster with Standard brokers and reconfigure them to write to the target (new) cluster with Express brokers.
  2. Before migrating the consumers, make sure that the MaxOffsetLag metric for the consumers has dropped to 0, confirming that they have processed all existing data in the source cluster.
  3. When this condition is met, stop the consumers and reconfigure them to read from the target cluster.

The offset lag happens if the consumer is consuming slower than the rate the producer is producing data. The flat line in the following metric visualization shows that the producer has stopped producing to the source cluster while the consumer attached to it continues to consume the existing data and eventually consumes all the data, therefore the metric goes to 0.

  1. Now you can update the bootstrap address in properties and consumer.properties to point to the target Express based MSK cluster. You can get the bootstrap address for IAM authentication from the MSK cluster (migration-express-broker-dest-cluster) on the Amazon MSK console under View Client Information.
export BS_TGT=<<TARGET_MSK_BOOTSTRAP_ADDRESS>>
sed -i "s/BOOTSTRAP_SERVERS_CONFIG=.*/BOOTSTRAP_SERVERS_CONFIG=${BS_TGT}/g" producer.properties
sed -i "s/bootstrap.servers=.*/bootstrap.servers=${BS_TGT}/g" consumer.properties

  1. Run the clickstream producer to generate events in the clickstream topic:
cd /home/ec2-user/clickstream-producer-for-apache-kafka/

java -jar target/KafkaClickstreamClient-1.0-SNAPSHOT.jar -t clickstream \
-pfp /home/ec2-user/producer.properties -nt 8 -rf 60 -iam \
-gsr -gsrr <<REGION>> -grn default-registry -gar

  1. In another Session Manager instance and from that shell, run the clickstream consumer to consume from the topic:
cd /home/ec2-user/clickstream-consumer-for-apache-kafka/

java -jar target/KafkaClickstreamConsumer-1.0-SNAPSHOT.jar -t clickstream \
-pfp /home/ec2-user/consumer.properties -nt 3 -rf 60 -iam \
-gsr -gsrr <<REGION>> -grn default-registry

We can see that the producers and consumers are now producing and consuming to the target Express based MSK cluster. The producers and consumers will run for 60 seconds before they exit.

The following screenshot shows producer-produced messages to the new Express based MSK cluster for 60 seconds.

Migrate stateful applications

Stateful applications such as Kafka Streams, KSQL, Apache Spark, and Apache Flink use their own checkpointing mechanisms to store consumer offsets instead of relying on Kafka’s consumer group offset mechanism. When migrating topics from a source cluster to a target cluster, the Kafka offsets in the source will differ from those in the target. As a result, migrating a stateful application along with its state requires careful consideration, because the existing offsets are incompatible with the target cluster’s offsets. Before migrating stateful applications, it is crucial to stop producers and make sure that consumer applications have processed all data from the source MSK cluster.

Migrate Kafka Streams and KSQL applications

Kafka Streams and KSQL store consumer offsets in internal changelog topics. It is advisable not to replicate these internal changelog topics to the target MSK cluster. Instead, the Kafka Streams application should be configured to start from the earliest offset of the source topics in the target cluster. This allows the state to be rebuilt. However, this method results in duplicate processing, because all the data in the topic is reprocessed. Therefore, the target destination (such as a database) must be idempotent to handle these duplicates effectively.

Express brokers don’t allow configuring segment.bytes to optimize performance. Therefore, the internal topics need to be manually created before the Kafka Streams application is migrated to the new Express based cluster. For more information, refer to Using Kafka Streams with MSK Express brokers and MSK Serverless.

Migrate Spark applications

Spark stores offsets in its checkpoint location, which should be a file system compatible with HDFS, such as Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3). After migrating the Spark application to the target MSK cluster, you should remove the checkpoint location, causing the Spark application to lose its state. To rebuild the state, configure the Spark application to start processing from the earliest offset of the source topics in the target cluster. This will lead to re-processing all the data from the start of the topic and therefore will generate duplicate data. Consequently, the target destination (such as a database) must be idempotent to effectively handle these duplicates.

Migrate Flink applications

Flink stores consumer offsets within the state of its Kafka source operator. When checkpoints are completed, the Kafka source commits the current consuming offset to provide consistency between Flink’s checkpoint state and the offsets committed on Kafka brokers. Unlike other systems, Flink applications don’t rely on the __consumer_offsets topic to track offsets; instead, they use the offsets stored in Flink’s state.

During Flink application migration, one approach is to start the application without a Savepoint. This approach discards the entire state and reverts to reading from the last committed offset of the consumer group. However, this prevents the application from accurately rebuilding the state of downstream Flink operators, leading to discrepancies in computation results. To address this, you can either avoid replicating the consumer group of the Flink application or assign a new consumer group to the application when restarting it in the target cluster. Additionally, configure the application to start reading from the earliest offset of the source topics. This enables re-processing all data from the source topics and rebuilding the state. However, this method will result in duplicate data, so the target system (such as a database) must be idempotent to handle these duplicates effectively.

Alternatively, you can reset the state of the Kafka source operator. Flink uses operator IDs (UIDs) to map the state to specific operators. When restarting the application from a Savepoint, Flink matches the state to operators based on their assigned IDs. It is recommended to assign a unique ID to each operator to enable seamless state restoration from Savepoints. To reset the state of the Kafka source operator, change its operator ID. Passing the operator ID as a parameter in a configuration file can simplify this process. Restart the Flink application with parameter --allowNonRestoredState (if you are running self-managed Flink). This will reset only the state of the Kafka source operator, leaving other operator states unaffected. As a result, the Kafka source operator resumes from the last committed offset of the consumer group, avoiding full reprocessing and state rebuilding. Although this might still produce some duplicates in the output, it results in no data loss. This approach is applicable only when using the DataStream API to build Flink applications.

Conclusion

Migrating from a Standard broker MSK cluster to an Express broker MSK cluster using MSK Replicator provides a seamless, efficient transition with minimal downtime. By following the steps and strategies discussed in this post, you can take advantage of the high-performance, cost-effective benefits of Express brokers while maintaining data consistency and application uptime.

Ready to optimize your Kafka infrastructure? Start planning your migration to Amazon MSK Express brokers today and experience improved scalability, speed, and reliability. For more details, refer to the Amazon MSK Developer Guide.


About the Author

Subham Rakshit is a Senior Streaming Solutions Architect for Analytics at AWS based in the UK. He works with customers to design and build streaming architectures so they can get value from analyzing their streaming data. His two little daughters keep him occupied most of the time outside work, and he loves solving jigsaw puzzles with them. Connect with him on LinkedIn.

Announcing ASCP integration with Pod Identity: Enhanced security for secrets management in Amazon EKS

Post Syndicated from Rodrigo Bersa original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/security/announcing-ascp-integration-with-pod-identity-enhanced-security-for-secrets-management-in-amazon-eks/

In 2021, Amazon Web Services (AWS) introduced the AWS Secrets and Configuration Provider (ASCP) for the Kubernetes Secrets Store Container Storage Interface (CSI) Driver, offering a reliable way to manage secrets in Amazon Elastic Kubernetes Service (Amazon EKS). Today, we’re excited to announce the integration of ASCP with Pod Identity, the new standard for AWS Identity and Access Management (IAM) integration with Amazon EKS. This integration provides enhanced security, simplified configuration, and improved Day-2 operation for applications running on EKS that need access to secrets stored in AWS Secrets Manager and AWS Systems Manager Parameter Store. In this post, we’ll cover use-case scenarios for single and cross-account secrets using Pod Identity integration with ASCP.

Amazon EKS introduced Pod Identity in 2023 as a feature that streamlines the process of configuring IAM permissions for Kubernetes applications. Pod Identity simplifies the identity management of applications running on top of Amazon EKS by allowing you to set up permissions directly through EKS interfaces, reducing the number of steps required and alleviating the need to switch between the EKS and IAM services. Pod Identity enables the use of a single IAM role across multiple clusters without updating trust policies, and it supports role session tags for more granular access control. This approach not only simplifies policy management by allowing the reuse of permission policies across roles, but also enhances security by enabling access to AWS resources based on matching tags.

Background

When your applications that are running on top of Amazon EKS require sensitive information like credentials to access a database, or a key to authenticate through an API, we call this kind of information secrets. You can secure, store, and manage secrets in AWS Secrets Manager. ASCP allows Kubernetes applications to securely retrieve the secrets stored in Secrets Manager and Systems Manager Parameter Store. Previously, ASCP relied on IAM roles for service accounts (IRSA) for authentication. Although IRSA provided improvements over previous methods, Pod Identity offers even greater security and simplicity.

Pod Identity provides a more secure and efficient way to integrate IAM roles with applications running on EKS, granting more granular AWS permissions to individual Pods, so that you don’t need instance-level credentials or IRSA.

This integration provides the following key benefits over using IRSA:

  • Enhanced security: Pod Identity provides a more granular and secure way to manage permissions at the Pod level, alleviating the need to expose the IAM role annotation on Kubernetes ServiceAccount objects.
  • Simplified configuration:Pod Identity streamlines and simplifies the setup process, reducing the potential for misconfiguration, especially in high-scale environments.
  • Improved operation: Pod Identity reduces the operational overhead compared to previous methods, centralizing the management with the AWS API.
  • Native EKS integration: Pod Identity is the new standard for IAM integration for applications running on EKS and provides a more cohesive experience.

Solution overview

With this integration, ASCP uses Pod Identity to authenticate and authorize access to AWS services. When a Pod requires access to a secret, the workflow is as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: The workflow performed by the Pod Identity and ASCP integration to provide access to a secret stored on AWS Secrets Manager for a Pod running on Amazon EKS

Figure 1: The workflow performed by the Pod Identity and ASCP integration to provide access to a secret stored on AWS Secrets Manager for a Pod running on Amazon EKS

The workflow is as follows:

  1. A user creates an IAM role and a Pod Identity association between the IAM role and the Kubernetes ServiceAccount assigned to the Pod.
  2. EKS API validates the Pod Identity association, allowing ASCP to use this role to authenticate with AWS services.
  3. If authorized, the Pod Identity agent allows ASCP to assume the IAM role assigned to the Pod through the use of a ServiceAccount token.
  4. The Pod retrieves the requested secrets values and makes them available to the Pod through the use of a mounted volume.

Prerequisites

You need to have the following prerequisites in place in order to implement this solution:

Implement the solution

This guide presents two scenarios: single-account setup and cross-account setup. Complete the single-account steps in Account A before proceeding to the cross-account configuration, which involves Account B. The cross-account setup builds on the single-account foundation to demonstrate secure secrets management across AWS accounts.

Amazon EKS cluster setup

Before you start, you’ll need to set up an Amazon EKS cluster with the required add-ons in a single account (Account A).

  1. (Optional) Use the following commands to set environment variables and create an Amazon EKS cluster:
    export CLUSTER_NAME=<YOUR_CLUSTER_NAME>
    export AWS_REGION=<YOUR_AWS_REGION>
    export NAMESPACE=<YOUR_NAMESPACE>
    export ACCOUNT_A=<ACCOUNT_ID_1>
    export ACCOUNT_B=<ACCOUNT_ID_2>
    export SECRET_NAME=<NAME_OF_YOUR_SECRET>
    export SECRET_NAME_CROSS=<NAME_OF_YOUR_CROSS_SECRET>

    Here are the environment variables for this demonstration:

    export CLUSTER_NAME=ascp-podidentity
    export SECRET_NAME=secret-a
    export AWS_REGION=$(aws configure get region)
    export NAMESPACE=default
    export SECRET_NAME=secret-a
    export SECRET_NAME_CROSS=secret-b

    Create the EKS cluster:

    eksctl create cluster —name $CLUSTER_NAME —version=1.31

  2. Update your kubeconfig file to enable Pod Identity on your EKS cluster (if it’s not already enabled):
    eksctl create addon --cluster $CLUSTER_NAME --name eks-pod-identity-agent

  3. Install the Secrets Store CSI driver:
    aws eks --region $AWS_REGION update-kubeconfig --name $CLUSTER_NAME
    helm repo add secrets-store-csi-driver https://kubernetes-sigs.github.io/secrets-store-csi-driver/charts
    helm install -n kube-system csi-secrets-store secrets-store-csi-driver/secrets-store-csi-driver

  4. Verify the Secrets Store CSI Driver installation:
    kubectl --namespace=kube-system get pods -l "app=secrets-store-csi-driver"

    You should see this expected output:

    NAME READY STATUS RESTARTS AGE
    csi-secrets-store-secrets-store-csi-driver-fcxf6 3/3 Running 0 41s
    csi-secrets-store-secrets-store-csi-driver-j9wqh 3/3 Running 0 41s

  5. Install the ASCP plugin:
    kubectl apply -f https://raw.githubusercontent.com/aws/secrets-store-csi-driver-provider-aws/main/deployment/aws-provider-installer.yaml

Consuming secrets in a single account

Now that you’ve set up your Amazon EKS cluster, in this use case, you’ll create an AWS Secrets Manager secret in the same account where the cluster and the applications reside (Account A).

  1. Create a secret in AWS Secrets Manager with tags kubernetes-namespace and eks-cluster-name within the same AWS account as the EKS cluster:
    aws secretsmanager create-secret --region $AWS_REGION \
    --name $SECRET_NAME \
    --tags Key=kubernetes-namespace,Value=$NAMESPACE Key=eks-cluster-name,Value=$CLUSTER_NAME \
    --secret-string "{"user":"user1","password":"passwd1"}"

    You should see this expected output:

    {
    "ARN": "arn:aws:secretsmanager:$AWS_REGION:$ACCOUNT_A:secret:dummy-secret-q1w2e3",
    "Name": "secret-a",
    "VersionId": "abcdefgh-1234-5678-ijklmnopqrst"
    }

    Note the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the new secret. You will use it in the next step.

  2. Create an IAM role and trust policy with the required permissions to retrieve the newly created secret within the same AWS account:
    SECRET_ARN=< NOTED_SECRET_ARN_FROM_PREVIOUS_STEP>
    cat << EOF > policy.json
    {
        "Version": "2012-10-17",
        "Statement": [
            {
                "Effect": "Allow",
                "Action": ["secretsmanager:GetSecretValue", "secretsmanager:DescribeSecret"],
                "Resource": ["$SECRET_ARN"],
                "Condition": {
                    "StringEquals": {
                        "secretsmanager:ResourceTag/kubernetes-namespace": "\${aws:PrincipalTag/kubernetes-namespace}",
                        "secretsmanager:ResourceTag/eks-cluster-name": "\${aws:PrincipalTag/eks-cluster-name}"
                    }
                }
            }
        ]
    }
    EOF

    In the preceding example IAM role permission policy, the use of conditions with kubernetes-namespace and eks-cluster-name tags helps enforce fine-grained access control by specifying that secrets can only be accessed by Pods from specific namespace and clusters. This allows secretsmanager actions only if the secret is tagged with the matching kubernetes-namespace and  eks-cluster-name values.

    cat << EOF > trust.json
    {
        "Version": "2012-10-17",
        "Statement": [
            {  
                "Effect": "Allow",
                "Principal": {
                    "Service": "pods.eks.amazonaws.com" 
                },
                "Action": [
                    "sts:AssumeRole",
                    "sts:TagSession"
                ]
            }
        ]
    }
    EOF

    Notice that the preceding example IAM role trust policy allows the Amazon EKS Pod Identity service (pods.eks.amazonaws.com) to assume the role and tag the session. These actions are necessary for Pod Identity to function correctly, enabling Pods to securely access AWS resources.

    Finally, apply the role and trust policy:

    aws iam create-role --role-name ascp-podidentity --assume-role-policy-document file://trust.json
    aws iam put-role-policy --role-name ascp-podidentity --policy-name ascp-podidentity --policy-document file://policy.json

    Note the ARN of the new role. You will use it in the next step.

  3. Create a Kubernetes ServiceAccount and add the Pod Identity association between the ServiceAccount and the IAM role:
    ROLE_ARN=<NOTED_ROLE_ARN_FROM_PREVIOUS_STEP>
    kubectl create serviceaccount serviceaccount-a
    
    aws eks create-pod-identity-association \
    --cluster-name "$CLUSTER_NAME" \
    --namespace "default" \
    --service-account serviceaccount-a \
    --role-arn $ROLE_ARN

  4. Create a SecretProviderClass to use the newly created secret in your Amazon EKS cluster.
    cat << EOF | kubectl apply -f -
    
    apiVersion: secrets-store.csi.x-k8s.io/v1
    kind: SecretProviderClass
    metadata:
      name: aws-secrets-manager
    spec:
      provider: aws
      parameters:
        objects: |
          - objectName: "secret-a" # Secret name or ARN to be mounted to the Pod
            objectType: "secretsmanager"
        usePodIdentity: "true" # Indicator to use Pod Identity instead of IRSA
        
    EOF

  5. Create a new deployment to consume your newly created secret using Pod Identity as a mounted volume.
    cat << EOF | kubectl apply -f -
    
    apiVersion: apps/v1
    kind: Deployment
    metadata:
      labels:
        app: application-a
      name: application-a
    spec:
      replicas: 1
      selector:
        matchLabels:
          app: application-a
      template:
        metadata:
          labels:
            app: application-a
        spec:
          containers:
          - image: public.ecr.aws/amazonlinux/amazonlinux:2023-minimal
            name: amazonlinux
            args:
            - infinity
            command:
            - sleep
     volumeMounts:
     - name: secrets-store-inline
     mountPath: "/mnt/secret" # Directory where secret will be mounted to
     readOnly: true
     volumes:
     - name: secrets-store-inline
     csi:
     driver: secrets-store.csi.k8s.io
     readOnly: true
     volumeAttributes:
     secretProviderClass: "aws-secrets-manager" # Match SecretProviderClass name created
     serviceAccountName: serviceaccount-a # Specify service account created
    
    EOF

  6. Validate that the deployment was created successfully and confirm the secret was mounted correctly.
    kubectl get pods -l app=application-a
    kubectl exec -it $(kubectl get pods -l app=application-a -o name) -- cat /mnt/secret/secret-a

    You should see this expected output:

    NAME READY STATUS RESTARTS AGE
    application-a-b98d44bb8-bzvn4 1/1 Running 0 3s
    
    {"user":"user1","password":"passwd1"}%

Working with cross-account secrets through resource policies

For this second use case, you’ll also use the Amazon EKS cluster on Account A, and create a new Secrets Manager secret in a different account (Account B).

In order to access a secret in a different account, you can’t use the default AWS Key Management Service (AWS KMS) key, but will use aws/secretsmanager to encrypt this secret. So you need to first create a new AWS KMS key that allows cross-account access.

On Account B

  1. Create a customer managed key on AWS KMS with cross-account permissions:
    cat < key-policy.json
    {
      "Version": "2012-10-17",
      "Id": "cross-account-access",
      "Statement": [
        {
          "Sid": "Enable IAM User Permissions",
          "Effect": "Allow",
          "Principal": {
            "AWS": "arn:aws:iam::${ACCOUNT_B}:root"
          },
          "Action": "kms:*",
          "Resource": "arn:aws:kms:${AWS_REGION}:${ACCOUNT_B}:key/*"
        },
        {
          "Sid": "Allow access for Key Administrators",
          "Effect": "Allow",
          "Principal": {
            "AWS": "arn:aws:iam::${ACCOUNT_B}:role/Admin"
          },
          "Action": [
            "kms:Create",
            "kms:Describe",
            "kms:Enable",
            "kms:List",
            "kms:Put",
            "kms:Update",
            "kms:Revoke",
            "kms:Disable",
            "kms:Get",
            "kms:Delete",
            "kms:TagResource",
            "kms:UntagResource",
            "kms:ScheduleKeyDeletion",
            "kms:CancelKeyDeletion",
            "kms:RotateKeyOnDemand"
          ],
          "Resource": "arn:aws:kms:${AWS_REGION}:${ACCOUNT_B}:key/*"
        },
        {
          "Sid": "Allow access through AWS Secrets Manager",
          "Effect": "Allow",
          "Principal": {
            "AWS": "*"
          },
          "Action": [
            "kms:Encrypt",
            "kms:Decrypt",
            "kms:ReEncrypt",
            "kms:CreateGrant",
            "kms:DescribeKey"
          ],
          "Resource": "arn:aws:kms:${AWS_REGION}:${ACCOUNT_B}:key/*",
          "Condition": {
            "StringEquals": {
              "kms:ViaService": "secretsmanager.${AWS_REGION}.amazonaws.com",
              "kms:CallerAccount": [
                "$ACCOUNT_A",
                "$ACCOUNT_B"
              ]
            }
          }
        },
        {
          "Sid": "Allow access through AWS Secrets Manager for Generate Data Key",
          "Effect": "Allow",
          "Principal": {
            "AWS": "*"
          },
          "Action": "kms:GenerateDataKey",
          "Resource": "arn:aws:kms:${AWS_REGION}:${ACCOUNT_B}:key/*",
          "Condition": {
            "StringEquals": {
              "kms:CallerAccount": [
                "$ACCOUNT_A",
                "$ACCOUNT_B"
              ]
            },
            "StringLike": {
              "kms:ViaService": "secretsmanager.${AWS_REGION}.amazonaws.com"
            }
          }
        },
        {
          "Sid": "Allow direct access to key metadata to the account",
          "Effect": "Allow",
          "Principal": {
            "AWS": [
              "arn:aws:iam::${ACCOUNT_A}:root",
              "arn:aws:iam::${ACCOUNT_B}:root"
            ]
          },
          "Action": [
            "kms:Describe",
            "kms:Get",
            "kms:List",
            "kms:RevokeGrant"
          ],
          "Resource": "arn:aws:kms:${AWS_REGION}:${ACCOUNT_B}:key/*"
        }
      ]
    }
    EOF

    Then create the KMS key:

    $ aws kms create key --region $AWS_REGION --policy file://key-policy.json

    You should see this expected output:

    {
        "KeyMetadata": {
            "AWSAccountId": "$ACCOUNT_B",
            "KeyId": "abcdefgh-1234-5678-90ij-klmnopqrstuv",
            "Arn": "arn:aws:kms:${AWS_REGION}:${ACCOUNT_B}:key/abcdefgh-1234-5678-90ij-klmnopqrstuv",
            "CreationDate": "2025-01-23T18:00:00.756000-05:00",
            "Enabled": true,
            "Description": "",
            "KeyUsage": "ENCRYPT_DECRYPT",
            "KeyState": "Enabled",
            "Origin": "AWS_KMS",
            "KeyManager": "CUSTOMER",
            "CustomerMasterKeySpec": "SYMMETRIC_DEFAULT",
            "KeySpec": "SYMMETRIC_DEFAULT",
            "EncryptionAlgorithms": [
                "SYMMETRIC_DEFAULT"
            ],
            "MultiRegion": false
        }
    }

    Take note of the KeyID and the ARN of the key. You can use it to create an alias for the newly created key:

    KEY_ID=<NOTED_KEY_ID_FROM_PREVIOUS_STEP>
    aws kms create-alias --region $AWS_REGION —-alias-name alias/secretsmanager-cross —-target-key-id $KEY_ID

  2. Create a new secret in Secrets Manager, using the new KMS key to encrypt it:
    aws secretsmanager create-secret --region $AWS_REGION \
    --name $SECRET_NAME_CROSS \
    --tags Key=kubernetes-namespace,Value=$NAMESPACE Key=eks-cluster-name,Value=$CLUSTER_NAME \
    --secret-string "This is a Cross Account Secret" \
    --kms-key-id $KEY_ID

    You should see this expected output:

    {
    "ARN": "arn:aws:secretsmanager:$AWS_REGION:$ACCOUNT_B:secret:secret-b-12345",
    "Name": "secret-b",
    "VersionId": "abcdefgh-1234-5678-ijklmnopqrst"
    }

    Note the ARN of the new secret. You will use it in the next step.

  3. Add a resource policy that allows the IAM role on Account A to access the newly created secret:
    SECRET_CROSS_ARN=< NOTED_SECRET_CROSS_ARN_FROM_PREVIOUS_STEP>
    cat << EOF > resource-policy.json
    
    {
      "Version" : "2012-10-17",
      "Statement" : [ {
        "Effect" : "Allow",
        "Principal" : {
          "AWS" : "arn:aws:iam::${ACCOUNT_A}:root"
        },
        "Action" : [ "secretsmanager:GetSecretValue", "secretsmanager:DescribeSecret" ],
        "Resource" : "$SECRET_CROSS_ARN"
        } 
      ]
    }
    
    EOF
    aws secretsmanager put-resource-policy --secret-id $SECRET_NAME_CROSS --resource-policy file://resource-policy.json

Now let’s go back to Account A.

On Account A

  1. Create a new IAM role and trust policy with the required permissions to retrieve the newly created secret within Account B:
    KEY_ARN=< NOTED_KEY_ARN_FROM_PREVIOUS_STEP>
    cat << EOF > cross-policy.json
    {
        "Version": "2012-10-17",
        "Statement": [
            {
                "Effect": "Allow",
                "Action": ["secretsmanager:GetSecretValue", "secretsmanager:DescribeSecret"],
                "Resource": ["$SECRET_CROSS_ARN"],
                "Condition": {
                    "StringEquals": {
                        "secretsmanager:ResourceTag/kubernetes-namespace": "\${aws:PrincipalTag/kubernetes-namespace}",
                        "secretsmanager:ResourceTag/eks-cluster-name": "\${aws:PrincipalTag/eks-cluster-name}"
                    }
                }
            },
            {
                "Effect": "Allow",
                "Action": [
                    "kms:Decrypt",
                    "kms:DescribeKey"
                    ],
                "Resource": "$KEY_ARN"
            }
        ]
    }
    EOF

    In the preceding example IAM role permission policy, note that the resource ARN is pointing to the secret created on Account B.

    cat << EOF > trust.json
    {
        "Version": "2012-10-17",
        "Statement": [
            {  
                "Effect": "Allow",
                "Principal": {
                    "Service": "pods.eks.amazonaws.com" 
                },
                "Action": [
                    "sts:AssumeRole",
                    "sts:TagSession"
                ]
            }
        ]
    }
    EOF

    The IAM role trust policy needs to have pods.eks.amazonaws.com as a trusted entity to perform the sts:AssumeRole and sts:TagSession actions.

    Next, create the role and apply the policy:

    aws iam create-role --role-name ascp-podidentity-cross --assume-role-policy-document file://trust.json
    aws iam put-role-policy --role-name ascp-podidentity-cross --policy-name ascp-podidentity-cross --policy-document file://cross-policy.json

    Note the ARN of the new role. You will use it in the next step.

  2. Create the second Kubernetes ServiceAccount and add the cross-account Pod Identity association:
    kubectl create serviceaccount serviceaccount-b
    
    ROLE_CROSS_ARN=<NOTED_ROLE_CROSS_ARN_FROM_PREVIOUS_STEP>
    aws eks create-pod-identity-association \
    --cluster-name "$CLUSTER_NAME" \
    --namespace "default" \
    --service-account serviceaccount-b \
    --role-arn $ROLE_CROSS_ARN

  3. Create a SecretProviderClass to use the cross-account secret created in Account B in your Amazon EKS cluster:
    cat << EOF | kubectl apply -f -
    
    apiVersion: secrets-store.csi.x-k8s.io/v1
    kind: SecretProviderClass
    metadata:
      name: aws-secrets-manager-cross
    spec:
      provider: aws
      parameters:
        objects: |
          - objectName: "$SECRET_CROSS_ARN" # Full ARN of the Secret in the ACCOUNT B to be mounted on Pod
            objectType: "secretsmanager"
        usePodIdentity: "true" # Indicator to use Pod Identity instead of IRSA
        
    EOF

  4. Create a new deployment to consume your newly created secret using Pod Identity as a mounted volume:
    cat << EOF | kubectl apply -f -
    
    apiVersion: apps/v1
    kind: Deployment
    metadata:
      labels:
        app: application-b
      name: application-b
    spec:
      replicas: 1
      selector:
        matchLabels:
          app: application-b
      template:
        metadata:
          labels:
            app: application-b
        spec:
          containers:
          - image: public.ecr.aws/amazonlinux/amazonlinux:2023-minimal
            name: amazonlinux
            args:
            - infinity
            command:
            - sleep
     volumeMounts:
     - name: secrets-store-cross
     mountPath: "/mnt/secret" # Directory where secret will be mounted to readOnly: true
     volumes:
     - name: secrets-store-cross
     csi:
     driver: secrets-store.csi.k8s.io
     readOnly: true
     volumeAttributes:
     secretProviderClass: "aws-secrets-manager-cross" # Match SecretProviderClass name created for cross-account access serviceAccountName: serviceaccount-b # Specify service account created for cross-account access
    
    EOF

  5. Validate that the deployment was created successfully and confirm the mounted secret:
    kubectl get pods -l app=application-b
    kubectl exec -it $(kubectl get pods -l app=application-b -o name) -- cat /mnt/secret/$SECRET_CROSS_ARN

    Note that the volume name is the secret ARN, because it’s a cross-account secret.

    You should see this expected output:

    NAME READY STATUS RESTARTS AGE
    application-b-67b755444f-ngrhv 1/1 Running 0 8s
    
    "This is a Cross Account Secret"%

Conclusion

The integration of ASCP with Pod Identity marks a significant step forward in secrets management for Amazon EKS. It offers enhanced security, simplified configuration, and improved operations. We encourage all EKS users to explore this new integration and take advantage of its benefits.

The integration of ASCP with Pod Identity offers these benefits over IRSA:

  1. Simplified setup: With Pod Identity, you don’t need to create and manage service accounts for each application.
  2. Enhanced security: Pod Identity provides more granular control over permissions at the Pod level.
  3. Improved scalability: Pod Identity is easier to implement in large-scale environments.
  4. Consistent AWS experience: Pod Identity aligns more closely with AWS best practices for IAM management.

For more information, see our documentation for: AWS Secrets Manager, AWS Secrets CSI Store Provider (ASCP), and Amazon EKS Pod Identity.

 
If you have feedback about this post, submit comments in the Comments section below. If you have questions about this post, contact AWS Support.
 

Rodrigo Bersa
Rodrigo Bersa

Rodrigo is a Senior Specialist Solutions Architect for Containers and AppMod, with a focus on security and infrastructure-as-code automation. In this role, Rodrigo aims to help customers achieve their business goals by leveraging best practices for AWS container services when building new environments or migrating existing technologies.
Akshay Aggarwal
Akshay Aggarwal

Akshay is a Senior Technical Product Manager on the AWS Secrets Manager team. As part of the AWS Cryptography team, Akshay drives technologies and defines best practices that help improve customers’ experiences of building secure, reliable workloads in the AWS Cloud. Akshay is passionate about building technologies that are easy to use, secure, and scalable.
Stephanie Shen
Stephanie Shen

Stephanie Shen is a Software Development Engineer at Amazon Web Services (AWS), working on the AWS Security Services team. She has over 8 years of experience, previously working as a Product Manager. Stephanie aims to help customers improve their security posture by enhancing the features on AWS security services.

How AWS Network Firewall session state replication maximizes high availability for your application traffic

Post Syndicated from Tushar Jagdale original https://aws.amazon.com/blogs/security/how-aws-network-firewall-session-state-replication-maximizes-high-availability-for-your-application-traffic/

AWS Network Firewall is a managed, stateful network firewall and intrusion protection service that you can use to implement firewall rules for fine grained control over your network traffic. With Network Firewall, you can filter traffic at the perimeter of your virtual private cloud (VPC); including filtering traffic going to and coming from an internet gateway, NAT gateway, over VPN or AWS Direct Connect. In this post, we show you how AWS Network Firewall uses session state replication to help maintain high availability for your application traffic.

Network Firewall session state replication

The stateful engine used by Network Firewall applies network security policies according to customer-defined rules. When inspecting stateful flows, Network Firewall maintains a reconstructed state—stored in a flow table—for each connection. Network Firewall is a distributed service, spreading traffic and the connection state over many backend firewall hosts using Gateway Load Balancer endpoints.

There are several operational reasons why backend hosts might be brought in and out of service, such as autoscaling events to adjust for changing traffic levels or installing software for security and other service updates. During these operations, if the traffic contains long-lived traffic flows, Network Firewall allows these flows to drain for several minutes before replacing the hosts and re-balancing them to the newer hosts.

When an existing flow is rebalanced onto a new host that doesn’t contain its connection state, the connection is handled according to the firewall policy’s configured stream exception policy. Network Firewall will either drop or reject these connections, or Network Firewall can be configured to continue applying the firewall policy’s rules without the context from earlier in the connection. Both choices have implications: using the drop or reject action maintains security by forcing connections to be restarted and re-inspected but at the cost of some broken connections, while the continue action requires writing firewall rules that can accept connections that are broken midstream.

In December 2024, AWS introduced the ability for Network Firewall to replicate the session state between backend hosts, reducing the number of cases where the stream exception policy needs to be applied to broken connections. Now, the majority of these failed-over flows go to a new host that already contains the correct flow state, allowing those connections to continue without interruption. This feature is automatically enabled by default on all firewalls and no action is required by you. The stream exception policy will continue to be applied in rare cases where the state cannot automatically be replicated or when connections are broken for other reasons such as routing changes in the network.

Figure 1: Session state replication flowFigure 1: Session state replication flow

Figure 1 shows the sequence of events to maintain persistent connection during operations to replace a backend firewall host:

  1. A network flow arrives at the Network Firewall endpoint and is forwarded to a firewall backend host (firewall host 1) by Gateway Load Balancer.
  2. Firewall host 1 is de-registered from the Gateway Load Balancer target group, which causes Gateway Load Balancer to stop assigning new flows to the host but maintains existing ones.
  3. The service exports the remaining session state table from backend firewall host 1.
  4. The service replicates the session table data to other healthy backend hosts.
  5. A flow flush operation causes Gateway Load Balancer to reassign the remaining flows on host 1 to other in-service hosts, where the ongoing flows will continue being inspected by the stateful inspection rules configured on the firewall.

Some of the key considerations for your own workloads:

Conclusion

In this post, we outlined how AWS Network Firewall uses its ability to replicate connection state across multiple backend firewall hosts to maintain high availability for your application traffic. This feature is enabled by default for existing and new customers and there are no additional costs or configuration changes required to use this feature.

To learn more about AWS Network Firewall, see the AWS Network Firewall product page and the service documentation. To see which AWS Regions AWS Network Firewall is available in, see AWS Services by Region.

 
If you have feedback about this post, submit comments in the Comments section below. If you have questions about this post, contact AWS Support.
 

Tushar Jagdale
Tushar Jagdale

Tushar is a Specialist Solutions Architect focused on Networking at AWS, where he helps customers build and design scalable, highly available, secure, resilient, and cost effective networks. He has over 15 years of experience building and securing data center and cloud networks.
Amish Shah
Amish Shah

Amish is a seasoned product leader with over 15 years’ experience developing innovative and scalable solutions for networking, security, and cloud use cases. He currently leads the AWS Network Firewall service, where he helps develop security solutions that protect AWS workloads. Outside of work, Amish enjoys playing cricket and soccer, loves to travel, and has recently started collecting niche fragrances.
Vikram Saurabh
Vikram Saurabh

Vikram is an experienced engineering leader with 20 years of experience in software engineering, primarily in building firewall products and services. He currently leads the AWS Network Firewall engineering team and has previously led the engineering team of Route53 DNS Firewall. Outside of work, Vikram enjoys playing cricket, hiking, and solving math puzzles.
Jamie Lavigne
Jamie Lavigne

Jamie is a Principal Software Dev Engineer with over 10 years of experience building and operating highly resilient network security services at AWS. Jamie has been a technical lead of the AWS Network Firewall service since its inception and continues to focus on ensuring that it meets the security, compliance, and availability needs of its internal and external customers.